ZyXEL Communications P660HNT1AV2 Wireless N-lite ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway User Manual

ZyXEL Communications Corporation Wireless N-lite ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway

User Manual

Download: ZyXEL Communications P660HNT1AV2 Wireless N-lite ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway User Manual
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]ZyXEL Communications P660HNT1AV2 Wireless N-lite ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway User Manual
Document ID1872984
Application ID9VVyvxben8yrr+zXJYVk8A==
Document DescriptionUser Manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize391.22kB (4890213 bits)
Date Submitted2013-01-02 00:00:00
Date Available2013-01-02 00:00:00
Creation Date2012-03-14 09:25:51
Producing SoftwareAcrobat Distiller 9.4.6 (Windows)
Document Lastmod2012-03-14 10:58:35
Document TitleUser Manual
Document CreatorFrameMaker 9.0

P-660HN-Tx v2
Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway
P-660HN-TxA v2
Wireless N-lite ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway
Default Login Details
LAN IP
Address
http://192.168.1.1
User Name
admin
Password
1234
Version 2.00
Editionwww.zyxel.com
1, 3/2012
www.zyxel.com
Copyright © 2012
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Note: This guide is a reference for a series of products. Therefore some features or
options in this guide may not be available in your product.
Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems,
operating system versions, or if you installed updated firmware/software for your device. Every
effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guid shows how to connect the ADSL Router and access the Web Configurator
wizards. (See the wizard real time help for information on configuring each screen.) It also
contains a connection diagram and package contents list.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
User’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................13
Introduction .............................................................................................................................................15
Introducing the Web Configurator ...........................................................................................................21
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................27
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................55
Connection Status and System Info Screens ..........................................................................................57
Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................63
Wireless LAN ..........................................................................................................................................79
Home Networking ..................................................................................................................................109
Static Route ...........................................................................................................................................123
Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................127
Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................139
Port Binding ...........................................................................................................................................149
Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................153
Filters ....................................................................................................................................................155
Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................161
Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................179
Certificate ..............................................................................................................................................183
Logs .....................................................................................................................................................189
Traffic Status .........................................................................................................................................191
User Account .........................................................................................................................................195
TR-069 Client ........................................................................................................................................197
System Settings ....................................................................................................................................201
Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................205
Backup/Restore .....................................................................................................................................207
Remote Management ............................................................................................................................ 211
Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................223
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................227
Product Specifications ...........................................................................................................................231
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Contents Overview
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 13
Chapter 1
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................15
1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................15
1.2 Ways to Manage the ADSL Router ...................................................................................................15
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ADSL Router ....................................................................................15
1.4 Applications for the ADSL Router .....................................................................................................16
1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................16
1.4.2 Wireless Access ......................................................................................................................16
1.4.3 Using the WPS/WLAN Button .................................................................................................17
1.5 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................18
1.5.1 Using the Reset Button ............................................................................................................19
1.6 Ways to Manage the ADSL Router ...................................................................................................19
Chapter 2
Introducing the Web Configurator ....................................................................................................21
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................21
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................21
2.2 The Web Configurator Layout ...........................................................................................................22
2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................23
2.2.2 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................24
2.2.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................24
Chapter 3
Tutorials ...............................................................................................................................................27
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................27
3.2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection ......................................................................................................27
3.3 IPv6 Address Configuration ..............................................................................................................30
3.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................30
3.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................31
3.4.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................32
3.4.3 Connecting Wirelessly to your ADSL Router ...........................................................................35
3.5 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access ..................................37
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
3.6 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server ................................................................................38
3.6.1 Port Forwarding .......................................................................................................................39
3.7 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service ...................................................................40
3.8 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network .................................................................43
3.9 Port Binding Configuration ................................................................................................................45
3.9.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections .............................................................45
3.9.2 Configuring Port Binding ..........................................................................................................48
3.10 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic ................................................................................................49
3.11 Access the ADSL Router from the Internet Using DDNS ................................................................53
3.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ................................................................53
3.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ADSL Router ..............................................................................54
3.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ......................................................................................................54
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 55
Chapter 4
Connection Status and System Info Screens ..................................................................................57
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................57
4.2 The Connection Status Screen .........................................................................................................57
4.3 The System Info Screen ....................................................................................................................58
Chapter 5
Broadband...........................................................................................................................................63
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................63
5.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens ...................................................................................63
5.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN ......................................................................................63
5.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................64
5.2 The Internet Connection Screen .......................................................................................................64
5.2.1 Advanced Setup ......................................................................................................................67
5.3 The More Connections Screen .........................................................................................................69
5.3.1 More Connections Edit ............................................................................................................70
5.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup .....................................................................72
5.4 WAN Technical Reference ................................................................................................................73
5.4.1 Encapsulation ..........................................................................................................................73
5.4.2 Multiplexing ..............................................................................................................................74
5.4.3 VPI and VCI .............................................................................................................................74
5.4.4 IP Address Assignment ...........................................................................................................74
5.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) ...................................................................................................75
5.4.6 NAT ..........................................................................................................................................75
5.5 Traffic Shaping ..................................................................................................................................75
5.5.1 ATM Traffic Classes .................................................................................................................76
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 6
Wireless LAN.......................................................................................................................................79
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................79
6.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens .....................................................................79
6.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless ................................................................................80
6.1.3 Before You Start .......................................................................................................................80
6.2 The General Screen ..........................................................................................................................80
6.2.1 No Security ..............................................................................................................................82
6.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ..........................................................................................................82
6.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) ....................................................................................................83
6.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication .............................................................................................................84
6.3 The More AP Screen .........................................................................................................................86
6.3.1 More AP Edit ...........................................................................................................................86
6.4 The MAC Authentication Screen .......................................................................................................88
6.5 The WPS Screen ..............................................................................................................................89
6.6 The WDS Screen ..............................................................................................................................90
6.7 The WMM Screen .............................................................................................................................92
6.8 The Scheduling Screen .....................................................................................................................92
6.9 The Advanced Screen .......................................................................................................................93
6.10 Wireless LAN Technical Reference .................................................................................................95
6.10.1 Wireless Network Overview ...................................................................................................95
6.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms .....................................................................................................96
6.10.3 Wireless Security Overview ...................................................................................................96
6.10.4 Signal Problems ....................................................................................................................99
6.10.5 BSS .......................................................................................................................................99
6.10.6 MBSSID ...............................................................................................................................100
6.10.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ...................................................................................100
6.10.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ...............................................................................................100
Chapter 7
Home Networking .............................................................................................................................109
7.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................109
7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens ..................................................................................109
7.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................109
7.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................................... 111
7.2 The LAN Setup Screen ................................................................................................................... 111
7.3 The Static DHCP Screen ................................................................................................................. 113
7.4 The UPnP Screen ........................................................................................................................... 114
7.5 The IP Alias Screen ........................................................................................................................ 114
7.5.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen ..................................................................................... 115
7.6 The IPv6 LAN Setup Screen ........................................................................................................... 115
7.7 Home Networking Technical Reference .......................................................................................... 119
7.7.1 LANs, WANs and the ADSL Router ....................................................................................... 119
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
7.7.2 DHCP Setup .......................................................................................................................... 119
7.7.3 DNS Server Addresses ......................................................................................................... 119
7.7.4 LAN TCP/IP ...........................................................................................................................120
7.7.5 RIP Setup ..............................................................................................................................121
7.7.6 Multicast ................................................................................................................................121
Chapter 8
Static Route .......................................................................................................................................123
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................123
8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens ......................................................................124
8.2 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................................124
8.2.1 Static Route Add/Edit ...........................................................................................................124
8.3 IPv6 Static Route .............................................................................................................................125
8.3.1 IPv6 Static Route Edit ..........................................................................................................126
Chapter 9
Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................127
9.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................127
9.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens ..................................................................................127
9.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS .....................................................................................128
9.2 The Quality of Service General Screen ...........................................................................................128
9.3 The Queue Screen ..........................................................................................................................129
9.3.1 Adding a QoS Queue ...........................................................................................................130
9.4 The Class Setup Screen ................................................................................................................131
9.4.1 Class Setup Add/Edit .............................................................................................................131
9.5 The QoS Game List Screen ...........................................................................................................135
9.6 QoS Technical Reference ...............................................................................................................136
9.6.1 IEEE 802.1p ..........................................................................................................................136
9.6.2 IP Precedence .......................................................................................................................136
9.6.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment ...................................................................................137
Chapter 10
Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................139
10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................139
10.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens ................................................................................139
10.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT ..................................................................................139
10.2 The NAT General Screen ..............................................................................................................140
10.3 The Port Forwarding Screen .........................................................................................................141
10.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen .............................................................................141
10.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Add/Edit ............................................................................................142
10.4 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................144
10.5 NAT Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................144
10.5.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................144
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
10.5.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................145
10.5.3 How NAT Works ..................................................................................................................145
10.5.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................146
10.5.5 NAT Mapping Types ............................................................................................................146
Chapter 11
Port Binding ......................................................................................................................................149
11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................149
11.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens ....................................................................150
11.2 The Port Binding General Screen .................................................................................................150
11.3 The Port Binding Screen ...............................................................................................................150
11.3.1 Port Binding Summary Screen .............................................................................................151
Chapter 12
Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................153
12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................153
12.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen ...............................................................................153
12.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS ...............................................................................153
12.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................153
Chapter 13
Filters .................................................................................................................................................155
13.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................155
13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens ...............................................................................155
13.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering .............................................................................155
13.2 The IP/MAC Filter Screen .............................................................................................................155
13.3 IPv6/MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................157
Chapter 14
Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................161
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................161
14.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens ...........................................................................161
14.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall ..............................................................................162
14.2 The Firewall General Screen ........................................................................................................164
14.3 The Default Action Screen ............................................................................................................165
14.4 The Rules Screen .........................................................................................................................166
14.4.1 The Rules Add Screen ........................................................................................................167
14.4.2 Customized Services ..........................................................................................................169
14.4.3 Customized Service Add/Edit .............................................................................................170
14.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................172
14.5.1 The DoS Advanced Screen .................................................................................................172
14.5.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds ..........................................................................................173
14.6 Firewall Technical Reference ........................................................................................................174
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
14.6.1 Firewall Rules Overview ......................................................................................................174
14.6.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall .......................................................175
14.6.3 Security Considerations .......................................................................................................176
14.6.4 Triangle Route .....................................................................................................................176
Chapter 15
Parental Control ................................................................................................................................179
15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................179
15.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................179
15.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule ............................................................................................180
Chapter 16
Certificate ..........................................................................................................................................183
16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................183
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................183
16.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................183
16.3 Local Certificates ...........................................................................................................................183
16.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................185
16.5 Trusted CA Import .......................................................................................................................185
16.6 View Certificate .............................................................................................................................186
Chapter 17
Logs ..................................................................................................................................................189
17.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................189
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................189
17.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................189
17.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................190
Chapter 18
Traffic Status .....................................................................................................................................191
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................191
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................191
18.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................191
18.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................192
18.4 The NAT Screen ............................................................................................................................193
Chapter 19
User Account ....................................................................................................................................195
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................195
19.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................195
Chapter 20
TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................197
10
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................197
20.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................197
Chapter 21
System Settings................................................................................................................................201
21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................201
21.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens .............................................................201
21.2 The System Screen .......................................................................................................................201
21.3 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................201
Chapter 22
Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................205
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................205
22.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................205
Chapter 23
Backup/Restore ................................................................................................................................207
23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................207
23.2 The Backup/Restore Screen .........................................................................................................207
23.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................209
Chapter 24
Remote Management........................................................................................................................ 211
24.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 211
24.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens .................................................... 211
24.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management ........................................................212
24.2 The WWW Screen ........................................................................................................................212
24.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen .............................................................................................212
24.3 The Telnet Screen .........................................................................................................................214
24.4 The FTP Screen ............................................................................................................................214
24.5 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................................215
24.5.1 Configuring SNMP ...............................................................................................................216
24.6 The DNS Screen ..........................................................................................................................217
24.7 The ICMP Screen ..........................................................................................................................218
24.8 The SSH Screen ...........................................................................................................................219
24.8.1 SSH Example ......................................................................................................................220
Chapter 25
Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................223
25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................223
25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens ......................................................................223
25.2 The General Screen ......................................................................................................................223
25.3 The DSL Line Screen ....................................................................................................................224
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
Chapter 26
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................227
26.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................227
26.2 ADSL Router Access and Login ....................................................................................................228
26.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................229
Chapter 27
Product Specifications .....................................................................................................................231
27.1 Hardware Specifications ................................................................................................................231
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address .......................................................................233
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting.......................................................................................253
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions .................................................261
Appendix D Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................269
Appendix E IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................283
Appendix F Services........................................................................................................................293
Appendix G Legal Information .........................................................................................................297
Index ..................................................................................................................................................301
12
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
P ART I
User’s Guide
13
14
C HAPT ER
Introduction
1.1 Overview
The P-660HN-Tx v2/P-660HN-TxA v2 are ADSL2+ routers. By integrating DSL and NAT, you are
provided with ease of installation and high-speed, shared Internet access. The ADSL Router is also
a complete security solution with a robust firewall and content filtering.
Please refer to the following description of the product name format.
• “H” denotes an integrated 4-port hub (switch).
• “N” denotes 802.11n. The “N” models support 802.11n wireless connection mode.
• Models with “1”, for example P-660HN-T1 v2, denote a device that works over the analog
telephone system, POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service). Models with “3” denote a device that
works over ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) or T-ISDN (UR-2).
Only use firmware for your ADSL Router’s specific model. Refer to the
label on the bottom of your ADSL Router.
Note: Not all models have all of the features shown in this User’s Guide.
1.2 Ways to Manage the ADSL Router
Use any of the following methods to manage the ADSL Router.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ADSL Router using a
(supported) web browser.
• Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service
engineers.
• FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ADSL Router
Do the following things regularly to make the ADSL Router more secure and to manage the ADSL
Router more effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
15
Chapter 1 Introduction
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the ADSL Router to its factory default settings. If you
backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the ADSL
Router. You could simply restore your last configuration.
1.4 Applications for the ADSL Router
Here are some example uses for which the ADSL Router is well suited.
1.4.1 Internet Access
Your ADSL Router provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or
MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. Computers can connect to the ADSL Router’s
Ethernet ports (or wirelessly).
Figure 1 ADSL Router’s Router Features
LAN
WAN
DSL
You can also configure firewall and filtering feature on the ADSL Router for secure Internet access.
When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is
initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not
allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files.
Use the filtering feature to block access to specific web sites or Internet applications such as MSN or
Yahoo Messenger. You can also configure IP/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic.
Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic
and/or to particular computers. For example, you could make sure that the ADSL Router gives voice
over Internet calls high priority, and/or limit bandwidth devoted to the boss’s excessive file
downloading.
1.4.2 Wireless Access
The ADSL Router is a wireless Access Point (AP) for IEEE 802.11b/g/n compliant clients, such as
notebook computers or PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to
16
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introduction
rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables. You can set up a wireless network with WPS (WiFi Protected
Setup) or manually add a client to your wireless network.
Figure 2 Wireless Access Example
1.4.3 Using the WPS/WLAN Button
By default, the wireless network on the ADSL Router is turned on. To turn it off, simply press the
WPS/WLAN button on top of the device for over 5 seconds. When the WPS/WLAN LED is green,
the wireless network is active.
You can also use the WPS/WLAN button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between
the ADSL Router and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time.
To activate WPS:
Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking.
Press the WPS/WLAN button for 1-5 seconds and release it. See below for WPS button location.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
17
Chapter 1 Introduction
Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the ADSL Router. The WPS/
WLAN LED should flash while the ADSL Router sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless
device.
Once the connection is successfully made, the WPS/WLAN LED shines green.
1.5 The RESET Button
If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET
button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you
will lose all configurations that you had previously and the user name and password will be reset to
the default.
18
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.5.1 Using the Reset Button
Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or
until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink,
the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.
1.6 Ways to Manage the ADSL Router
Use any of the following methods to manage the ADSL Router.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ADSL Router using a
(supported) web browser.
• FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
19
Chapter 1 Introduction
20
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Introducing the Web Configurator
2.1 Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 3
and later versions, or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by
768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator, you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
See Appendix C on page 261 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet
Explorer.
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
Make sure your ADSL Router hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
Launch your web browser.
Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL.
A password screen displays. Type “admin” (default) as the username and “1234” as the password,
and click Login. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login.
Figure 3 Password Screen
Note: For security reasons, the ADSL Router automatically logs you out if you do not use
the web configurator for five minutes (default). If this happens, log in again.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
21
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly
recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and
click Apply; alternatively click Skip to proceed to the Connection Status screen if you do not want
to change the password now.
Figure 4 Change Password Screen
The Connection Status screen appears.
Figure 5 Connection Status
Click System Info to display the System Info screen, where you can view the ADSL Router’s
interface and system information.
2.2 The Web Configurator Layout
Click Connection Status > System Info to show the following screen.
22
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
Figure 6 Web Configurator Layout Screen
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
• A - title bar
• B - main window
• C - navigation panel
2.2.1 Title Bar
The title bar shows the following icon in the upper right corner.
Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
23
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
2.2.2 Main Window
The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this
document.
After you click System Info on the Connection Status screen, the System Info screen is
displayed. See Chapter 4 on page 58 for more information about the System Info screen.
If you click LAN Device on the System Info screen, the Connection Status screen appears. See
Chapter 4 on page 57 for more information about the Connection Status screen.
If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the
connection status of the ADSL Router’s ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected
ports are gray.
2.2.3 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure ADSL Router features.
The following table describes each menu item.
Table 1 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
TAB
Connection Status
FUNCTION
This screen shows the network status of the ADSL Router and
computers/devices connected to it.
Network Setting
Broadband
Wireless
24
Internet
Connection
Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address
assignment, DNS servers and other advanced properties.
More Connections
Use this screen to configure additional WAN connections.
General
Use this screen to turn the wireless connection on or off, specify
the SSID(s) and configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN
authentication/security settings.
More AP
Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the ADSL Router.
MAC
Authentication
Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless
devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the ADSL Router.
WPS
Use this screen to use WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) to establish a
wireless connection.
WDS
Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links
to other access points.
WMM
Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM).
Scheduling
Use this screen to configure when the ADSL Router enables or
disables the wireless LAN.
Advanced
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings such as
output power.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
Table 1 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
Home
Networking
Static Route
QoS
NAT
Port Binding
Dynamic DNS
TAB
FUNCTION
LAN Setup
Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other
advanced properties.
Static DHCP
Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC
addresses.
IP Alias
Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into dfferent logical
networks.
UPnP
Use this screen to enable the UPnP function.
IPv6 LAN Setup
Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings on the ADSL
Router’s LAN interface.
Static Route
Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the ADSL
Router.
IPv6 Static Route
Use this screen to configure IPv6 static routes.
General
Use this screen to enable QoS and decide allowable bandwidth
using QoS.
Queue
Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment.
Class Setup
Use this screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different
flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a
classified traffic flow.
Game List
Use this screen to give priority to traffic for specific games.
General
Use this screen to activate/deactivate NAT.
Port Forwarding
Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside
world.
DMZ
Use this screen to configure a default server which receives
packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding
screen.
General
Use this screen to activate/deactivate port binding.
Port Binding
Use this screen to configure and view port binding groups.
Dynamic DNS
Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP
address.
IP/MAC Filter
Use this screen to configure IPv4/MAC filtering rules for incoming
or outgoing traffic.
IPv6/MAC Filter
Use this screen to configure IPv6/MAC filtering rules for incoming
or outgoing traffic.
General
Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall.
Default Action
Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on
packets that do not match any of the firewall rules.
Rules
Use this screen to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit
or remove a firewall rule.
Dos
Use this screen to set the thresholds that the ADSL Router uses to
determine when to start dropping sessions that are not fully
established (half-open sessions).
Parental Control
Use this screen to define time periods and days during which the
ADSL Router performs parental control and/or block web sites
with the specific URL.
Security
Filter
Firewall
Parental Control
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
25
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
Table 1 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
Local Certificates
Use this screen to export self-signed certificates or certification
requests and import the ADSL Router’s CA-signed certificates.
Trusted CA
Use this screen to save CA certificates to the ADSL Router.
Log
Log
Use this screen to view the logs for the level that you selected.
You can export or e-mail the logs.
Traffic Status
WAN
Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going
through the WAN port of the ADSL Router.
LAN
Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going
through the LAN ports of the ADSL Router.
NAT
Use this screen to view the status of NAT sessions on the ADSL
Router.
Users Account
Users Account
Use this screen to configure the passwords your user accounts.
TR-069 Client
TR-069 Client
Use this screen to configure the ADSL Router to be managed by
an Auto Configuration Server (ACS).
System
System
Use this screen to configure management inactivity time-out
setting.
Time
Time Setting
Use this screen to change your ADSL Router’s time and date.
Log Setting
Log Setting
Use this screen to select which logs and/or immediate alerts your
device is to record. You can also set it to e-mail the logs to you.
Firmware
Upgrade
Firmware Upgrade
Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.
Backup/Restore
Backup/Restore
Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Reboot
Reboot
Use this screen to reboot the ADSL Router without turning the
power off.
RemoteMGMT
WWW, Telnet, FTP,
SNMP, DNS, ICMP,
SSH
Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for specific
network service.
Diagnostic
Ping
Use this screen to test the connections to other devices.
DSL Line
Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection.
Certificates
System Monitor
Maintenance
26
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Tutorials
3.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to use the ADSL Router’s various features.
• Setting Up Your DSL Connection, see page 27
• IPv6 Address Configuration, see page 30
• Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 30
• Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access, see page 37
• Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server, see page 38
• Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server, see page 38
• Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service, see page 40
• Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 43
• Port Binding Configuration, see page 45
• Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic, see page 49
• Access the ADSL Router from the Internet Using DDNS, see page 53
3.2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection
This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the web configurator.
If you connect to the Internet through a DSL connection, use the information from your Internet
Service Provider (ISP) to configure the ADSL Router. Do the following steps:
Connect the ADSL Router properly. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on the ADSL Router’s
hardware connection.
Connect one end of a DSL cable to the DSL port of your ADSL Router. The other end should be
connected to the DSL port in your house or a DSL router/modem provided by your ISP.
Connect one end of Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port on the ADSL Router and the other end to a
computer that you will use to access the web configurator.
Connect the ADSL Router to a power source, turn it on and wait for the POWER LED to become a
steady green.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
27
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Account Configuration
For this example, the interface type is ADSL and the connection has the following information.
General
Mode
Router
Encapsulation
PPPoE
User Name
1234@DSL-Ex.com
Password
ABCDEF!
Service Name
My DSL
Multiplex
LLC
IPv6/IPv4 Dual
Stack
Enabled
PPP
Authentication
Auto
VPI
VCI
33
Others
IP Address: Obtain IP Address Automatically
DNS Server: Obtained From ISP
IPv6 Address: Obtain IPv6 Address Automatically
DHCP IPv6: DHCP
DHCP PD: Enable
WAN Identifier Type: EUI64
28
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Go to Network Setting > Broadband, enter or select these values and click Apply.
This completes your DSL WAN connection setting.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
29
Chapter 3 Tutorials
3.3 IPv6 Address Configuration
If the ISP’s network supports IPv6, the ISP may assign an IPv6 address to the ADSL Router
automatically.
IPv6
IPv6
IPv6
In the Network Setting > Broadband screen’s IPv6 Address configuration section, select
Obtain an IP Address Automatically. In the DHCP IPv6 field select DHCP to obtain an IPv6
address from a DHCPv6 server. In the DHCP PD field select Enable to have the ADSL Router pass
the WAN prefix to LAN hosts. The LAN hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6
addresses.
3.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network
Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet.
In this wireless network, the ADSL Router serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the
wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP.
Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the ADSL Router. Then he can set up a
wireless network using WPS (Section 3.4.2 on page 32) or manual configuration (Section 3.4.3 on
page 35).
30
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
3.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings
This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network. In the client, choose the
AP with the SSID configured here. When prompted for a key, use the Pre-Shared Key configured
here.
SSID
SecureWirelessNetwork
Security Mode
WPA2-PSK
Pre-Shared Key
DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork
802.11 Mode
802.11b+g+n
Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Configure the screen using the
provided parameters (see page 31). Click Apply.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > Advanced and make sure 802.11b+g+n is selected in the
802.11 Mode field. Click Apply.
EX
AM
PL
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
31
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and
the ADSL Router (see Section 3.4.2 on page 32). He can also use the notebook’s wireless client to
search for the ADSL Router (see Section 3.4.3 on page 35).
3.4.2 Using WPS
This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. WPS is a way to automatically
set up a secure wireless network connection between an AP and a notebook. Limitations of using
WPS are that is must be done two devices at a time and within two minutes. It uses the ADSL
Router as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook.
Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter
or PCMCIA card).
There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
• Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two
methods.
• PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the ADSL Router. A
wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings
from the ADSL Router.
Push Button Configuration (PBC)
32
Make sure that your ADSL Router is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the
wireless signal.
Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook.
Make sure wireless LAN is enabled and the wireless security mode is set to WPA-PSK2 or No
Security in the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen.
In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button
(Start or WPS button).
Push and hold the WPS button on the ADSL Router for 1-2 seconds. Alternatively, you may log into
ADSL Router’s web configurator, enable WPS and click the WPS button in the Network Setting >
Wireless > WPS screen.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Note: It doesn’t matter which button (on the client or the ADSL Router) is pressed first.
You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one.
The ADSL Router sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to
two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the ADSL Router securely.
The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by
pressing a button on both ADSL Router and wireless client.
Example WPS Process: PBC Method
The Device
Wireless Client
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Press and hold for
5 seconds
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
PIN Configuration
When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the ADSL Router’s web
configurator and the wireless client’s utility.
Launch your wireless client’s configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method
to get a PIN number.
Enter the PIN number in the PIN section in the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen on
the ADSL Router.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
33
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Click the Start and Register buttons (or the button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless
client utility screen and the ADSL Router’s WPS screen within two minutes.
The ADSL Router authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to
the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to
communicate with the ADSL Router securely.
The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a ADSL Router
and a wireless client by using PIN method.
34
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Example WPS Process: PIN Method
Wireless Client
The Device
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
3.4.3 Connecting Wirelessly to your ADSL Router
This section describes how to connect wirelessly to your ADSL Router. The connection procedure is
shown here using Windows XP as an example.
Right-click the wireless adapter icon which appears in the bottom right of your computer monitor.
Click View Available Wireless Networks.
Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > SecuritOpen the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
35
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Tutorial: Status
Select the ADSL Router’s SSID name and click Connect (A). The SSID “SecureWirelessNetwork” is
given here as an example.
Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > SecuritOpen the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status
Tutorial: Status
You are prompted to enter a password. Enter it and click Connect.
Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > SecuritOpen the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status
Tutorial: Status
You may have to wait several minutes while your computer connects to the wireless network.
You should now be securely connected wirelessly to the ADSL Router.
Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > SecuritOpen the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status
Tutorial: Status
36
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Congratulations! Your computer is now ready to connect to the Internet wirelessly through your
ADSL Router.
Note: If you cannot connect wirelessly to the ADSL Router, check you have selected the
correct SSID and entered the correct security key. If that does not work, ensure
your wireless network adapter is enabled by clicking on the wireless adapter icon
and clicking Enable.
3.5 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting
Wireless Internet Access
Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and
downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she
can concentrate on preparing for her final exams.
Josephine’s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the ADSL Router. Thomas can
deny access to the wireless network using the MAC address of Josephine’s computer.
Thomas
Josephine
Check the MAC address (physical address) of the wireless card on Josephine’s computer using the
“ipconfig /all” command in a Command Prompt.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
37
Chapter 3 Tutorials
C:\>ipconfig /all
Ethernet adapter Wireless Network Connection:
Media State . . . . . . . . . . . : Media connected
Description . . . . . . . . . . . : Wireless USB Adapter
Physical Address. . . . . . . . . : 00-1E-52-C3-5C-1B
---------------------------SNAP!--------------------------------
Click Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. Select the wireless network in the
SSID field and then Deny in the MAC Restrict Mode field.
Enter the MAC address that you want to deny. Click OK.
EX
AM
PL
Josephine will no longer be able to access the Internet wirelessly through the ADSL Router.
3.6 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server
Thomas manages a Doom server on a computer behind the ADSL Router. In order for players on
the Internet (like A in the figure below) coming through the default WAN connection (PVC0) to
communicate with the Doom server, Thomas can use port forwarding.
38
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup
D=192.168.1.34
LAN
WAN
port 666
3.6.1 Port Forwarding
Thomas needs to configure the port settings and IP address on the ADSL Router. Traffic should be
forwarded to port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34.
Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer
(see Section 10.3 on page 141 for more information).
Activate NAT in the Network Setting > NAT > General screen. Click Apply.
Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding. Select PVC0 as the WAN interface and click
Add new rule.
Configure the screen with the following values:
Service Name
Select User Define.
Start/End Ports
Enter 666 as the Start and End port.
Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the Doom server (192.168.1.34 for this example).
The screen should look as follows. Click Apply.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
39
EX
AM
LE
Chapter 3 Tutorials
The port forwarding settings you configured appear in the table. The ADSL Router forwards port
666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192.168.1.34.
EX
AM
LE
Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas’ Doom server.
3.7 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service
By default the firewall will block traffic originating from the WAN (1). However, if you are running a
server or other service, you may need to allow access from the WAN (2). The following tutorial will
show how to allow traffic from WAN to LAN if it matches a specified port number.
Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup
WAN
LAN
40
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Click Security > Firewall and select Custom. Click Apply to save your settings.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS
Click the Rules tab. In the Packet Direction field select WAN to LAN and click Add.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
The Add New Firewall Rule screen will appear. Click the Edit Customized Services button to
access the following screen. Click Add and configure the following settings. In this tutorial, a
hypothetical port 123 is allowed. Click OK.
Service Name
My_Service
Service Type
TCP
Port Number
123
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
41
Chapter 3 Tutorials
In the Add New Firewall Rule screen, select Active. In the Available Services field, select the
service you configured, My_Service. Click OK.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
42
The firewall rule you configured appears in the table. The ADSL Router allows traffic from the WAN
to LAN if it matches port 123.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
3.8 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another
Network
In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to
the ADSL Router’s LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial
shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings.
In the following figure, router R is connected to the ADSL Router’s LAN. R connects to two
networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from
computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the ADSL Router’s
WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic.
N1
N2
You need to specify a static routing rule on the ADSL Router to specify R as the router in charge of
forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the ADSL Router routes traffic from A to R and then R routes
the traffic to B.
N1
N2
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
43
Chapter 3 Tutorials
This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 2 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER
IP ADDRESS
The ADSL Router’s WAN
172.16.1.1
The ADSL Router’s LAN
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.34
R’s N1
192.168.1.253
R’s N2
192.168.10.2
192.168.10.33
To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
Log into the ADSL Router’s Web Configurator.
Click Network Setting > Static Route.
Click Edit on a new rule in the Static Route screen.
Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
4a
Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2.
4b
Type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field.
4c
Enter 1 in the Metric field.
4d
Click OK.
Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure B’s firewall
settings to allow specific traffic to pass through.
44
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
3.9 Port Binding Configuration
This tutorial shows you how to configure port binding for WAN connections with different ATM QoS
settings for different types of traffic. The port binding feature is used to group each WAN connection
with specific LAN ports and WLANs. In this example ATM QoS settings are configured for a WAN PVC
for time sensitive Media-On-Demand (MOD) traffic. ATM QoS settings are also configured for
another WAN PVC for non-time sensitive data traffic.
3.9.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections
This example shows an application for multiple WAN connections with different ATM QoS Settings.
More than one WAN connection on the ADSL Router may be configured to record traffic statistics or
calculate service charges.
Three WAN connections are configured over the ADSL line:
• The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/33, is dedicated for general data transmission.
• The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/34, is dedicated for VoIP service.
• The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/35, is dedicated for Media-On-Demand (MOD) service.
To configure bandwidth for the WAN connections, access the WAN configuration Advanced Setup
screen by clicking Network Setting > Broadband. Click Advanced Setup.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
45
EX
AM
PL
Chapter 3 Tutorials
To configure bandwidth for the data connection, select UBR with PCR in the ATM QoS Type field.
Click Apply.
46
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
To configure dedicated bandwidth of 400 kbps for the VoIP connection, select CBR in the ATM QoS
Type field and enter the Peak Cell Rate as 943 (divide the bandwidth 400000 bps by 424). Click
Apply to save the settings.
To configure variable bandwidth of 2 Mbps for MOD data connection, select Realtime VBR in the
ATM QoS Type field. Set the Peak Cell Rate as 4717 (divide the bandwidth 2mbps by 424) and
set both the Sustain Cell Rate and Maximum Burst Size as 4716 (which is less than the peak
cell rate). Click Apply to save the settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
47
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Configured WAN connections can be viewed by clicking the More Connections tab under Network
Setting > Broadband. See the WAN Setup chapter (Chapter 5 on page 63) for more information
on configuring WAN connections and ATM QoS settings.
3.9.2 Configuring Port Binding
You can then group specific WAN PVCs with LAN ports or WLANs, so traffic from these ports is
forwarded through specific WAN PVCs. In the configuration shown below, the WAN connections set
up in the previous section are bound as follows:
Table 3 Port Binding Groups
48
GROUP INDEX
WAN CONNECTION
LAN PORT
PVC0 - for Data
eth1, eth2, AP0
PVC1 - for VoIP
eth3
PVC2 - for MOD
eth4
Access the port binding screen by clicking Network Setting > Port Binding, and select Activated
Port Binding to turn on the port binding feature.
Click the Port Binding tab, specify the Group Index and select the ports to include in the port
binding group. Click Apply.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
MP
LE
The configured groups can be viewed by clicking the Port Binding Summary button. See the Port
Binding chapter (Chapter 11 on page 149) for more details on configuring port binding.
3.10 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic
This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen.
Let’s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic
because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also
upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your
colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other
branch offices.
In the following figure you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest priority. You
can do the following:
• Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic from the LAN
interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion.
• Note the MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue
1.
Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the ADSL Router.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
49
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS
mapping table on the ADSL Router.
DSL
Your computer
MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF
E-mail: Queue 1
A colleague’s computer
Other traffic: Automatic classifier
Click Network Setting > QoS and check Active QoS. Click Apply.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS
Go to Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup. Click the Edit icon next to an entry to configure
a queue.
Select Active and give it a name (Queue1 in this example). Select WAN in the Interface field and
1 in the Priority and Weight fields. Then click OK.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
50
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Go to Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup and click Add new Classifier.
Select Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below. Then click OK. Note that you
have to select TCP in the IP Protocol field first, then you can configure the source port range
setting.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
51
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup
52
Interface
Select From LAN.
To Queue
Link this to a queue created in the Network Setting > QoS
> Queue Setup screen, which is the 1 queue created in
this example.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Tutorials
Source MAC Address
Type the MAC address of your computer AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the Source Mac Netmask if
you know it.
Source Port Range
Enter the port number to which the rule should be applied 25 for SMTP.
Protocol ID
Select the IP protocol type - TCP.
This maps e-mail traffic to queue 1 created in the previous screen (see the Source Port Range
field). This also maps your computer’s MAC address to queue 1 (see the Source MAC Address
field).
3.11 Access the ADSL Router from the Internet Using
DDNS
If you connect your ADSL Router to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is
inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The ADSL Router’s WAN IP address
changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the ADSL Router using a domain
name.
http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
w.x.y.z
a.b.c.d
To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org.
This tutorial shows you how to:
• Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
• Configuring DDNS on Your ADSL Router
• Testing the DDNS Setting
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS.
3.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org.
Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and
password.
Log into www.dyndns.org using your account.
Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
53
Chapter 3 Tutorials
• Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
• Service Type: Host with IP address
• IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your ADSL Router is currently using. You can find the
IP address on the ADSL Router’s web configurator Status page.
Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the ADSL Router later.
3.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ADSL Router
Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > Dynamic DNS screen.
• Select Active Dynamic DNS.
• Select www.dyndns.org in the Service Provider field.
• Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field.
• Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345).
Click Apply.
3.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting
Now you should be able to access the ADSL Router from the Internet. To test this:
54
Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the
Internet.
Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter].
The ADSL Router’s login page should appear. You can then log into the ADSL Router and manage it.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
P ART II
Technical Reference
55
56
C HAPT ER
Connection Status and System Info Screens
4.1 Overview
After you log into the web configurator, the Connection Status screen appears. This shows the
network connection status of the ADSL Router and clients connected to it.
Use the System Info screen to look at the current status of the device, system resources and
interfaces (LAN, WAN, WLAN).
4.2 The Connection Status Screen
Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning
message appears if there is a connection problem.
If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing mode selection box. You
can configure how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen in Refresh Interval.
Figure 7 Connection Status: Icon View
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
57
Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens
Figure 8 Connection Status: List View
In Icon View, if you want to view information about a client, click the client’s name and then click
on Info..
In List View, you can also view the client’s information.
4.3 The System Info Screen
Click Connection Status > System Info to open this screen.
Figure 9 System Info Screen
58
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 4 System Info Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Select how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen from the drop-down
list box.
Device Information
Host Name
This field displays the ADSL Router system name. It is used for identification.
Model Name
This is the model name of your device.
MAC Address
This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your ADSL Router.
Firmware
Version
This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device. It also shows
the date the firmware version was created. Go to the Maintenance > Firmware
Upgrade screen to change it.
DSL Version
This is the current version of the ADSL Router’s DSL modem code.
WAN Information
DSL Mode
This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP.
Annex Type
This is the ADSL Annex Type that your ADSL Router is using.
IP Address
This field displays the current IP address of the ADSL Router in the WAN.
IP Subnet Mask
This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.
Default
Gateway
This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable.
Primary/
Secondary DNS
This is the primary/secondary DNS server IP address assigned to the ADSL Router.
IPv6 Global IP
This is the current IPv6 address of the ADSL Router in the WAN. Click this to go to the
screen where you can change it.
IPv6 Prefix
Length
This is the current IPv6 prefix length in the WAN.
IPv6 Gateway
This is the IPv6 address of the default gateway, if applicable.
IPv6 WAN
DNS1/2
This is the primary/secondary DNS server IPv6 address assigned to the ADSL Router.
Link-Local
Address
This is the link local address assigned to the ADSL Router within the LAN.
IPv4/IPv6 MTU
This is the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) for IPv4 and IPv6 packets passing
through the WAN interface.
VPI/VCI
This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the
Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection screen.
LAN Information
IP Address
This field displays the current IP address of the ADSL Router in the LAN.
IP Subnet Mask
This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN.
IPv6 Address
This is the current IPv6 address of the ADSL Router in the LAN. Click this to go to the
screen where you can change it.
IPv6 Prefix
Length
This is the current IPv6 prefix length in the LAN.
IPv6 Prefix
This is the current IPv6 prefix in the LAN.
IPv6 Global IP
This is the current global IPv6 address of the ADSL Router.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
59
Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens
LABEL
DHCP
DESCRIPTION
This field displays what DHCP services the ADSL Router is providing to the LAN. Choices
are:
Server - The ADSL Router is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other
computers in the LAN.
Relay - The ADSL Router acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests
and responses between the remote server and the clients.
None - The ADSL Router is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN.
IPv6 LAN DNS1/ This is the first/second DNS server IPv6 address the ADSL Router passes to the DHCP
clients.
WLAN Information
Status
This displays whether wireless LAN is turned on or off.
SSID
This is the descriptive name used to identify the ADSL Router in the wireless LAN.
Channel
This is the channel number used by the ADSL Router now.
Security Mode
This displays the type of security the ADSL Router is using in the wireless LAN.
WPS
Configured displays when the WPS security settings have been configured and wireless
clients can connect with the device through WPS. Unconfigured displays when the
device has not been configured and wireless clients can’t establish a link with the device
through WPS.
Scheduling
This displays whether WLAN scheduling is activated.
WiFi MAC
This is the MAC (Media Access Control) of the WiFi interface.
Security
Firewall
This displays whether or not the ADSL Router’s firewall is activated. Click this to go
tothe screen where you can change it.
Interface Status
Interface
This column displays each interface the ADSL Router has.
Status
This field indicates whether or not the ADSL Router is using the interface.
For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or
connected), Initializing (line is initializing), Establishing Link (line is establishing a
link) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down (line is down), Up (line is up or
connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a
call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation.
For the LAN interface, this field displays Up when the ADSL Router is connected through
an Ethernet cable to a computer or a HUB. It displays Down when the ADSL Router’s
Ethernet port is disconnected.
For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when
WLAN is disabled.
Rate
For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed.
For the WAN interface, this displays the DSL link rate downstream and upstream.
For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate.
For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is
enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled.
System Status
60
DSL UpTime
This field displays how long the DSL connection has been active
System UpTime
This field displays how long the ADSL Router has been running since it last started up.
The ADSL Router starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance >
Reboot), or when you reset it (see Chapter 1 on page 18).
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens
LABEL
Current Date/
Time
DESCRIPTION
This field displays the current date and time in the ADSL Router. You can change this in
Maintenance > Time Setting.
System Resource
CPU Usage
This field displays what percentage of the ADSL Router’s processing ability is currently
used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the ADSL Router is running at full load,
and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to
have more throughput, you should turn off other applications.
Memory Usage
This field displays what percentage of the ADSL Router’s memory is currently used.
Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to
100% and remains like that for a high period of time, the ADSL Router may become
unstable and you should restart it. See Chapter 23 on page 209, or turn off the device
(unplug the power) for a few seconds.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
61
Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Screens
62
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Broadband
5.1 Overview
This chapter describes the ADSL Router’s Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your
ADSL Router for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the
Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other
networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 10 LAN and WAN
LAN
WAN
5.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens
• Use the Internet Connection screen (Section 5.2 on page 64) to configure the WAN settings on
the ADSL Router for Internet access.
• Use the More Connections screen (Section 5.3 on page 69) to set up additional Internet access
connections.
5.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set
up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your
ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP
over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name)
for user authentication.
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the ADSL Router, which makes it accessible from an
outside network. It is used by the ADSL Router to communicate with other devices in other
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
63
Chapter 5 Broadband
networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the ADSL Router
tries to access the Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and
DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP
encapsulation method).
Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of
hosts on the network - not everybody and not just one.
IGMP
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP
version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use.
IPv6
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to increase IP address space and enhance features.
The ADSL Router supports IPv4/IPv6 dual stack and can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks. See
(Appendix E on page 283) for more information about IPv6.
Finding Out More
See Section 5.4 on page 73 for technical background information on WAN.
5.1.3 Before You Begin
You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this
information from your ISP.
5.2 The Internet Connection Screen
Use this screen to change your ADSL Router’s WAN settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband
> Internet Connection. The screen differs by the WAN type and encapsulation you select.
64
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Figure 11 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 5 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Line
ADSL Mode
Select the mode supported by your ISP.
Use Auto Sync-Up if you are not sure which mode to choose from. The ADSL Router
dynamically diagnoses the mode supported by the ISP and selects the best
compatible one for your connection.
Other options are ADSL2+, ADSL2, G.DMT, T1.413 and G.lite.
General
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
65
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 5 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Mode
Select Router (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP gives you one IP
address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select
Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If
you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the ADSL
Router.
Encapsulation
Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box.
Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field.
If you select Router in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or
PPPoE.
If you select Bridge in the Mode field, method of encapsulation is not available.
User Name
(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the user name exactly as your ISP
assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a
service name, then enter both components exactly as given.
Password
(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the password associated with the user
name above.
Service Name
(PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here.
Multiplex
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices
are VC or LLC.
IPv6/IPv4 Dual Stack
If you select Enable, the ADSL Router can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and
choose the protocol for applications according to the address type. If you select
Disable, the ADSL Router will operate in IPv4 mode.
PPP Authentication
The ADSL Router supports PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP
(Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). CHAP is more secure than PAP;
however, PAP is readily available on more platforms.
Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls.
Options are:
AUTO - Your ADSL Router accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote
node.
CHAP - Your ADSL Router accepts CHAP only.
PAP - Your ADSL Router accepts PAP only.
Virtual Circuit ID
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual
circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information.
VPI
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management
of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
IP Address
This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field.
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not
fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet.
Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address;
otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP
Address field and a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) below.
DNS Server - This section is not available when you select Bridge in the Mode field.
Obtain DNS info
Automatically
Select this to have the ADSL Router get the DNS server addresses from the ISP
automatically.
Use the following
Select this to have the ADSL Router use the DNS server addresses you configure
Static DNS IP Address manually.
66
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 5 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
IPv6 Address
Obtain an IP Address
Automatically
Select this option if you want to have the ADSL Router use the IPv6 prefix from the
connected router’s Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address.
DHCP IPv6
Select DHCP if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address
automatically generated by the ADSL Router using the IPv6 prefix from an RA.
Select SLAAC (Stateless address autoconfiguration) to have the ADSL Router use the
prefix to automatically generate a unique IP address that does not need to be
maintained by a DHCP server.
Selelct Auto to have the ADSL Router ??
DHCP PD
Select Enable to use DHCP PD (Prefix Delegation) to allow the ADSL Router to pass
the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts can then use the prefix to
generate their IPv6 addresses.
WAN Identifier Type
Select Manual to manually enter a WAN Identifier as the interface ID to identify the
WAN interface. The WAN Identifier is appended to the IPv6 address prefix to create
the routable global IPv6 address. Select EUI64 to use the EUI-64 format to generate
an interface ID from the MAC address of the WAN interface.
WAN Identifier
If you selected Manual, enter the WAN Identifier in this field. The WAN identifier
should be unique and 64 bits in hexadecimal form. Every 16 bit block should be
separated by a colon as in XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX where X is a hexadecimal
character. Blocks of zeros can be represented with double colons as in
XXXX:XXXX::XXXX.
Connection (PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only)
Keep Alive
Select Keep Alive when you want your connection up all the time. The ADSL Router
will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
Advanced Setup
Click this to display the Advanced WAN Setup screen and edit more details of your
WAN setup. Click this button again to display less fields in this screen.
5.2.1 Advanced Setup
Use this screen to edit your ADSL Router's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup
button in the Internet Connection screen. The screen appears as shown.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
67
Chapter 5 Broadband
Figure 12 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection: Advanced Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection: Advanced Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
RIP Direction
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information
with other routers. Use this field to control how much routing information the ADSL
Router sends and receives on the subnet.
Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only.
RIP Version
This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field.
Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP2-B and RIP2-M.
Multicast
Multicast packets are sent to a group of computers on the LAN and are an alternative
to unicast packets (packets sent to one computer) and broadcast packets (packets
sent to every computer).
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a multicast group. The ADSL Router supports IGMP-v1, IGMP-v2
and IGMP-v3. Select None to disable it.
MLD Proxy
Select the version of MLD proxy (v1 or v2) to have the ADSL Router act as for this
connection. This allows the ADSL Router to get subscription information and maintain
a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic
significantly. Select None to turn off MLD proxy.
ATM QoS
ATM QoS Type
68
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or
data traffic. Select UBR With PCR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are
non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit
Rate) type for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled
delay and delay variation. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit
Rate) type for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay
variation.
Peak Cell Rate
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell
Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the
PCR here.
Sustain Cell Rate
The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be
transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default
is 0 cells/sec.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection: Advanced Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Maximum Burst
Size
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at
the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
PPPoE Passthrough
If encapsulation type is PPPoE, select this to enable PPPoE Passthrough. In addition to
the Device’s built-in PPPoE client, you can select this to allow hosts on the LAN to use
PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the device. Each
host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.
MTU
MTU
The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed
on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field.
For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500.
For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492.
For PPPoA and RFC 1483, the MTU is 65535.
5.3 The More Connections Screen
The ADSL Router allows you to configure more than one Internet access connection. To configure
additional Internet access connections click Network Setting > Broadband > More
Connections. The screen differs by the encapsulation you select. When you use the Broadband >
Internet Connection screen to set up Internet access, you are configuring the first WAN
connection.
Figure 13 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is an index number indicating the number of the corresponding connection.
Active
This field indicates whether the connection is active or not.
Clear the check box to disable the connection. Select the check box to enable it.
Node Name
This is the name you gave to the Internet connection.
VPI/VCI
This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI)
numbers configured for this WAN connection.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
69
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 7 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Encapsulation
This field indicates the encapsulation method of the Internet connection.
Modify
The first (ISP) connection is read-only in this screen. Use the Broadband > Internet
Connection screen to edit it.
Click the Edit icon to edit the Internet connection settings. Click this icon on an empty
configuration to add a new Internet access setup.
Click the Remove icon to delete the Internet access setup from your connection list.
5.3.1 More Connections Edit
Use this screen to configure a connection. Click the edit icon in the More Connections screen to
display the following screen.
Figure 14 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
70
Active
Select the check box to activate or clear the check box to deactivate this connection.
Node Name
Enter a unique, descriptive name of up to 13 ASCII characters for this connection.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 8 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Mode
Select Router from the drop-down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share
an Internet account.
If you select Bridge, the ADSL Router will forward any packet that it does not route to
this remote node; otherwise, the packets are discarded.
Encapsulation
Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box.
Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field.
If you select Router in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or
PPPoE.
If you select Bridge in the Mode field, method of encapsulation is not available.
Multiplex
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are
VC or LLC.
By prior agreement, a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit, for example, VC1 will
carry IP. If you select VC, specify separate VPI and VCI numbers for each protocol.
For LLC-based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation, one VC carries multiple protocols with
protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. In this case, only
one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols.
IPv6/IPv4 Dual
Stack
If you select Enable, the ADSL Router can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and choose
the protocol for applications according to the address type. If you select Disable, the
ADSL Router will operate in IPv4 mode.
VPI
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of
ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
IP Address
This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field.
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed;
the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet.
If you use the encapsulation type except RFC 1483, select Obtain an IP Address
Automatically when you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select Static IP
Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below.
If you use RFC 1483, enter the IP address given by your ISP in the IP Address field.
Subnet Mask
Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
Gateway IP
Address
Specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP).
Primary DNS
Enter the primary DNS server’s address for the ADSL Router.
Secondary
DNS
Enter the secondary DNS server’s address for the ADSL Router.
NAT
SUA Only is available only when you select Router in the Mode field.
Select SUA Only if you have one public IP address and want to use NAT. Otherwise, select
None to disable NAT.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Advanced Setup
Click this to display more fields in this screen to configure more details of your WAN
settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
71
Chapter 5 Broadband
5.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup
Use this screen to edit your ADSL Router's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup
arrow icon in the More Connections Edit screen. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 15 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
RIP & Multicast Setup
RIP Direction
Select the RIP Direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only.
RIP Version
This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field.
Select the RIP Version from RIP-1, RIP2-B and RIP2-M.
Multicast
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a multicast group. The ADSL Router supports IGMP-v1, IGMP-v2 and
IGMP-v3. Select None to disable it.
ATM QoS
ATM QoS Type
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data
traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such
as e-mail. Select nrtVBR (Variable Bit Rate-non Real Time) or rtVBR (Variable Bit RateReal Time) for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications.
Peak Cell Rate
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate
(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.
Sustain Cell
Rate
The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted.
Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec.
Maximum Burst
Size
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the
peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
MTU
72
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 9 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MTU
The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an
interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field.
For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500.
For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492.
For PPPoA and RFC, the MTU is 100-1500.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
5.4 WAN Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
5.4.1 Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The ADSL Router supports the
following methods.
5.4.1.1 ENET ENCAP
The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP
network protocol. IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and
then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it
encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET ENCAP requires that you specify
a gateway IP address in the Gateway IP Address field in the wizard or WAN screen. You can get
this information from your ISP.
5.4.1.2 PPP over Ethernet
The ADSL Router supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft
standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem
(DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing
access control systems (for example RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a
function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and
offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the ADSL Router (rather than individual computers), the
computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the ADSL Router does that part
of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
73
Chapter 5 Broadband
5.4.1.3 PPPoA
PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection
functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The ADSL Router encapsulates the PPP session based
on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service
Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364
for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.
5.4.1.4 RFC 1483
RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit
(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a
separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed
information.
5.4.2 Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to
use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
VC-based Multiplexing
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for
example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where
dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
LLC-based Multiplexing
In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained
in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be
advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if
charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
5.4.3 VPI and VCI
Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers
assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is
reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information.
5.4.4 IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a
different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have
either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices
for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway.
74
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation
If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable
(N/A). If you have a Static IP Address assigned by your ISP, then they should also assign you a
Subnet Mask and a Gateway IP Address.
IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation
In this case the IP address assignment must be static.
IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation
In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP you must fill in all the IP
Address and Gateway IP Address fields as supplied by your ISP. However for a dynamic IP, the
ADSL Router acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and Gateway IP
Address fields are not applicable (N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the ADSL Router.
5.4.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP)
A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic
demand. The ADSL Router does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. The first is
that idle timeout is disabled. The second is that the ADSL Router will try to bring up the connection
when turned on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be very
expensive for obvious reasons.
Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flat-rate service or you
need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern.
5.4.6 NAT
NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in
a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a
different IP address known within another network.
5.5 Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate
and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate
congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video
connections.
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may
be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a
maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed
because it is dependent on the line speed.
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the
maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be
greater than the PCR.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
75
Chapter 5 Broadband
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS
is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more
cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that
correlates to your upstream line rate.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 16 Example of Traffic Shaping
5.5.1 ATM Traffic Classes
These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0
Specification.
Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being
sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections
that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds
this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution
video and voice.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use
the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time
(VBR-nRT) connections.
The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely
controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is
specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would
be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth
requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical
on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an
VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
76
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't
guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An
example application is background file transfer.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
77
Chapter 5 Broadband
78
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Wireless LAN
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing your wireless
network, including the following.
• Turning the wireless connection on or off.
• Configuring a name, wireless channel and security for the network.
• Using WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) to configure your wireless network.
• Setting up multiple wireless networks.
• Using a MAC (Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the wireless network.
• Performing other performance-related wireless tasks.
6.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens
This section describes the ADSL Router’s Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens
to set up your ADSL Router’s wireless connection.
• Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless
security mode (Section 6.2 on page 80).
• Use the More AP screen (see Section 6.3 on page 86) to set up multiple wireless networks on
your ADSL Router.
• Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC
addresses from connecting to the ADSL Router (Section 6.4 on page 88).
• Use the WPS screen (see Section 6.5 on page 89) to enable or disable WPS, generate a security
PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information about the ADSL Router’s WPS status.
• Use the WDS screen (see Section 6.6 on page 90) to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in
which the ADSL Router acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points.
• Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless
networks for multimedia applications (Section 6.7 on page 92).
• Use the Scheduling screen (see Section 6.8 on page 92) to configure the dates/times to enable
or disable the wireless LAN.
• Use the Advanced screen to configure wireless advanced features (Section 6.9 on page 93).
You don’t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection. For example,
you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless radio channel and security in the General
screen.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
79
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
6.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and
receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one
another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange
information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking
devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to
use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in
that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data
encryption.
Finding Out More
See Section 6.10 on page 95 for advanced technical information on wireless networks.
6.1.3 Before You Start
Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See Section 6.1.2 on
page 80 if some of the terms used here are not familiar to you.
• What wireless standards do the other wireless devices in your network support (IEEE 802.11g,
for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?
• What security options do the other wireless devices in your network support (WPA-PSK, for
example)? What is the strongest security option supported by all the devices in your network?
• Do the other wireless devices in your network support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you
can set up a well-secured network very easily.
Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to set up your
network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this is somewhat more
complicated to do.
• What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to configure advanced
options such as Quality of Service, ensure that you know precisely what you want to do. If you do
not want to configure advanced options, leave them as they are.
6.2 The General Screen
Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode.
Note: If you are configuring the ADSL Router from a computer connected to the wireless
LAN and you change the ADSL Router’s SSID, channel or security settings, you will
lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then
change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ADSL Router’s new
settings.
Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen.
80
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Figure 17 Network Setting > Wireless > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Network Setting > Wireless > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless
Select Enable Wireless LAN to activate wireless LAN.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless
Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same
SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
Hide SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Client Isolation
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other
through the ADSL Router.
MBSSID/LAN
Isolation
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in
other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the ADSL Router.
Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSID’s wireless
clients to only connect to the Internet through the ADSL Router.
Channel
Selection
Set the operating channel manually by selecting a channel from the Channel Selection
list or use Auto to have it automatically determine a channel to use.
Operating
Channel
This field displays the channel the ADSL Router is currently using.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
81
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Table 10 Network Setting > Wireless > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Security Mode
Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this
wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have
same wireless security settings as the ADSL Router. When you select to use a security,
additional options appears in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any
data encryption or authentication.
See the following sections for more details about this field.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
6.2.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any
data encryption or authentication.
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your ADSL Router, your network is
accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 18 Wireless > General: No Security
6.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption)
WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points
(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points
must use the same WEP key.
Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using
widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more
effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the
wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices
support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing
stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available.
Your ADSL Router allows you to configure one 64-bit or 128-bit WEP key.
82
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the
General screen, then select Basic as the security level.
Figure 19 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 11 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the ADSL Router automatically generate a password. The
password field will not be configurable when you select this option.
Password
The password (WEP key) are used to encrypt data. Both the ADSL Router and the wireless
stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
WEP Encryption
Select 64-bits or 128-bits.
This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.
6.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK)
The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over
WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the ADSL Router and the connecting client share a
common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not
as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust
version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK
makes it less robust than it could be.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
83
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list.
Figure 20 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 12 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Security Mode
Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.
Pre-Shared Key
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only
difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password,
instead of user-specific credentials.
more.../hide more
Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide more to hide them.
WPA-PSK Compatible
This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode.
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters.
Select Enable to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to
your ADSL Router. The ADSL Router supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK
simultaneously. Otherwise, select Disable.
Group Key Update
Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new
group key out to all clients.
Encryption
This field displays the encryption type for data encryption.
If you choose WPA-PSK as the security mode, the ADSL Router uses TKIP for data
encryption.
If you choose WPA2-PSK as the security mode and enable WPA-PSK Compatible, the
ADSL Router uses either TKIP and AES (TKIPAES MIX) for data encryption.
If you choose WPA2-PSK as the security mode but disable WPA-PSK Compatible, the
ADSL Router uses AES for data encryption.
6.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication
The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It
requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security
protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least
backwards compatible with older devices.
84
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server
on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than
WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices.
Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the
security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list.
Figure 21 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select More Secure to enable WPA(2) data encryption.
Security Mode
Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box.
Authentication Server
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation.
Port Number
Enter the port number of the external authentication server.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do
so with additional information.
Shared Secret
Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between
the external authentication server and the ADSL Router.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your ADSL
Router. The key is not sent over the network.
more.../hide more
Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide more to hide them.
ReAuthentication
Timer
Enter how often the external authentication server requires a connected wireless client
to reauthenticate itself to the server again.
Network Re-auth
Interval
Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order
to stay connected.
This field is available only when you select WPA2 as security mode. If wireless station
authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the
RADIUS server has priority.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
85
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Table 13 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WPA Compatible
This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the ADSL Router to support
WPA and WPA2 simultaneously.
Group Key Update
Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new
group key out to all clients.
Encryption
Select the encryption type for data encryption.
If you choose WPA as the security mode, the ADSL Router uses TKIP for data
encryption.
If you choose WPA2 as the security mode and enable WPA-PSK Compatible, the ADSL
Router uses either TKIP and AES (TKIPAES MIX) for data encryption.
If you choose WPA2 as the security mode but disable WPA-PSK Compatible, the ADSL
Router uses AES for data encryption.
6.3 The More AP Screen
This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the ADSL
Router.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > More AP. The following screen displays.
Figure 22 Network Seting > Wireless > More AP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of each SSID profile.
Active
This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A
gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active.
SSID
An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the ADSL Router’s BSSs. The SSID
(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated.
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for
an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility.
Security
This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
6.3.1 More AP Edit
Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen.
The following screen displays.
86
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Figure 23 More AP: Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 15 More AP: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless
Select Enable Wireless LAN to activate wireless LAN.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless
device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must
have the same SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless
LAN.
Hide SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station
cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Client Isolation
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each
other through the ADSL Router.
MBSSID/LAN Isolation
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients
in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the ADSL Router.
Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSID’s
wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the ADSL Router.
Security Level
Security Mode
Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on
this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network
must have same wireless security settings as the ADSL Router. After you select to
use a security, additional options appears in this screen.
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without
any data encryption or authentication.
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
87
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
6.4 The MAC Authentication Screen
This screen allows you to configure the ADSL Router to give exclusive access to specific devices
(Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ADSL Router (Deny). Every Ethernet device
has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and
consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know
the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
Use this screen to view your ADSL Router’s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click
Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 24 Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SSID
Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings.
MAC List
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.
Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering.
Select Allow to permit access to the ADSL Router. MAC addresses not listed will be denied
access to the ADSL Router.
Select Deny to block access to the ADSL Router. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to
access the ADSL Router.
Add new MAC
address
88
Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below.
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
ADSL Router in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format,
that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
This is the index number of the entry.
MAC Address
This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
ADSL Router.
Modify
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
6.5 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your ADSL Router.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS. See Section 6.10.8.3 on page 103 for more information about WPS.
Note: The ADSL Router applies the security settings configured in the General screen (see
Section 6.2 on page 80). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have
set the security mode to WPA2-PSK or No Security.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click
Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen.
Figure 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 17 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
WPS
Select Enable to activate WPS on the ADSL Router. Otherwise, select Disable to
deactivate WPS.
Add a new device with WPS Method
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
89
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Table 17 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Method 1 PBC
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration
(PBC).
WPS
Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of
the ADSL Router) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button
on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen.
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of
pressing this button.
Method 2 PIN
Register
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into
the ADSL Router.
Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click
Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s
settings.
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its
PIN to the ADSL Router.
WPS Configuration Summary
AP PIN
The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the ADSL Router is shown here. Enter this
PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Click the Generate New PIN button to have the ADSL Router create a new PIN.
Status
This displays Configured when the ADSL Router has connected to a wireless network
using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have
been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the
screen.
This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless
security changes on the ADSL Router or you click Release to remove the configured
wireless and wireless security settings.
Release
Configuration
The default WPS status is Configured.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS
connections on the ADSL Router.
802.11 Mode
This field displays the ADSL Router’s wireless mode that only allows the compliant WLAN
devices to associate with it.
SSID
This field displays the SSID the ADSL Router is currently using.
Security
This field displays the security mode the ADSL Router is currently using.
Pre-Shared Key
This field displays the pre-shared key the ADSL Router uses when the security mode is
set to WPA(2)-PSK.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
6.6 The WDS Screen
An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge
allowing you to wirelessly connect wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to
configure the ADSL Router to connect to other APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled.
90
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the ADSL Router
and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security
settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the ADSL Router and
any wireless clients.
Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models
support WDS links. Check your other AP’s documentation.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WDS. The following screen displays.
Figure 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WDS Security
Select the type of the key used to encrypt data between APs. All the wireless APs
(including the ADSL Router) must use the same pre-shared key for data transmission.
The option is available only when you set the security mode to WPA(2) or WPA(2)PSK in the Wireless > General screen.
TKIP
Select this to use TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) encryption.
AES
Select this to use AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption.
This is the index number of the individual WDS link.
Active
Select this to activate the link between the ADSL Router and the peer device to which
this entry refers. When you do not select the check box this link is down.
Remote Bridge
MAC Address
Type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal
character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc).
PSK
Enter a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including
spaces and symbols).
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
91
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
6.7 The WMM Screen
Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for
multimedia applications.
Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays.
Figure 27 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable WMM of
SSID1~4
Use these checkbox to determine whether to have the ADSL Router automatically give a
service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends for
a wireless network. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to
voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
6.8 The Scheduling Screen
Use the wireless LAN scheduling to configure the days you want to enable or disable the wireless
LAN. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling. The following screen displays.
92
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Figure 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless LAN
Scheduling
Select Enable or Disable to activate or deactivate wireless LAN scheduling on your
ADSL Router.
State
Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN.
Day
Check the day(s) you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off.
Time (24-Hour
Format)
Specify a time frame during which the schedule would apply.
For example, if you set the time range from 12:00 to 23:00, the wireless LAN will be
turned on only during this time period.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
6.9 The Advanced Screen
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless >
Advanced, the screen appears as shown.
See Section 6.10.2 on page 96 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
93
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Figure 29 Network Setting > Wireless> Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless> Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Fragmentation
Threshold
This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and
2346.
Output Power
Set the output power of the ADSL Router. If there is a high density of APs in an area,
decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the
following: 100%, 75%, 50% or 25%.
Preamble
Select a preamble type from the drop-down list menu. Choices are Long or Short. See
the Appendix D on page 273 for more information.
802.11 Mode
Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate
with the ADSL Router.
Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate
with the ADSL Router.
Select 802.11b+g to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the ADSL Router. The transmission rate of your ADSL Router
might be reduced.
Select 802.11n to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the
ADSL Router.
Select 802.11g+n to allow either IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the ADSL Router. The transmission rate of your ADSL Router
might be reduced.
Select 802.11b+g+n to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant
WLAN devices to associate with the ADSL Router. The transmission rate of your ADSL
Router might be reduced.
Channel Width
Select whether the ADSL Router uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or Auto. If
Auto is selected, the ADSL Router will use 40MHz if it is supported.
A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz
channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps.
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase
throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20
MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal.
Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your
neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding.
This field is available only when you set the 802.11 Mode to 802.11n or 802.11b+g+n
in the Advanced Setup screen.
94
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
6.10 Wireless LAN Technical Reference
This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix.
6.10.1 Wireless Network Overview
Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.
• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with
numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients,
extending a network’s range.
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless
clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to
one another in order to exchange information.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 30 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the
access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your
ADSL Router is the AP.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
95
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or
frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the
information that is sent in the wireless network.
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For
the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a
variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you
create a network, you must select a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of
available channels also varies.
6.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the ADSL Router’s
Web Configurator.
Table 22 Additional Wireless Terms
TERM
DESCRIPTION
Preamble
A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble
modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the ADSL
Router does, it cannot communicate with the ADSL Router.
Authentication
The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network.
Fragmentation
Threshold
A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger
threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.
6.10.3 Wireless Security Overview
By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this
means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data
passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to
the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to
compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to
ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried
on it.
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people
presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a “key” phrase) can access the
network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only
96
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been
authenticated are given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired
Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a
determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a
user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you
use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter
long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short
key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary.
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have
sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless
network should ensure that effective security is in place.
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure
information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random
and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and
her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use
“70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key.
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless
network.
6.10.3.1 SSID
Normally, the ADSL Router acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You
can hide the SSID instead, in which case the ADSL Router does not broadcast the SSID. In addition,
you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless
devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that
is sent in the wireless network.
6.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC
address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example,
00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless
network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the ADSL Router which devices are allowed or not allowed
to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have
the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless
network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an
authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
1.
Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2.
Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
97
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
6.10.3.3 User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every
device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS
server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server,
you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network,
even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized
wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and
password to use the wireless network.
6.10.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot
understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section
6.10.3.3 on page 98 for information about this.)
Table 23 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
Weakest
NO AUTHENTICATION
RADIUS SERVER
No Security
WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest
WPA2-PSK
WPA2
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users
do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or
WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network
supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the ADSL Router and you do not
have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two
devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA-PSK. Therefore, you
should set up Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still
possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your ADSL Router, you can also select an option (WPA
compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some
support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network
login) and select the WPA compatible option in the ADSL Router.
98
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer
the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.
6.10.4 Signal Problems
Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance,
interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference
occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio
transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are
coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when
physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
6.10.5 BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a
wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is
disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other.
When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired
network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 31 Basic Service set
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
99
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
6.10.6 MBSSID
Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well
as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The ADSL
Router’s MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point
to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security
modes to different SSIDs.
Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.
6.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs
• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.
• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs
(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s
communications (but not communicate with each other).
• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.
6.10.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
The ADSL Router can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution
System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to.
Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is
made.
At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to
your other access point’s documentation for details.
The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a
wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can
establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1
has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2.
Figure 32 WDS Link Example
WDS
AP 1
AP 2
6.10.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)
Your ADSL Router supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure
wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its
configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device
100
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two
minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set
up a secure network by themselves.
6.10.8.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled
device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.
Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in
their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.
Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration
utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the ADSL Router,
see Section 6.6 on page 90).
Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the ADSL Router you must
press the WPS button for more than three seconds.
Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name
(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s
configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
6.10.8.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be
static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking
on a button in the configuration interface).
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure
that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to
activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of
both devices to use the PIN method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client)
into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated
on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends
the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router
(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.
Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to
do this.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
101
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the
client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the
ADSL Router, see Section 6.5 on page 89).
Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can
either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.
On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect,
WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If
you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer)
connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
102
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Figure 33 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
WPS
This device’s
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
from other device:
WPS
START
WPS
START
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
COMMUNICATION
6.10.8.3 How WPS Works
When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts
as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts
as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a
secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the
WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the
existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA2)-PSK randomly.
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a
WPS-enabled access point.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
103
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Figure 34 How WPS works
ACTIVATE
WPS
ACTIVATE
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
WPS HANDSHAKE
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two
minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS
transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing
networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the
enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network
and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is
unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a
WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A
configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS
connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset
it to its factory defaults.
6.10.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are
unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1
is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security
information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.
104
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Figure 35 WPS: Example Network Step 1
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURITY INFO
AP1
CLIENT 1
In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar
mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must
connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the
registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies
the existing security information to Client 2.
Figure 36 WPS: Example Network Step 2
REGISTRAR
EXISTING CONNECTION
AP1
CLIENT 1
ENROLLEE
YI
RIT
SE
NF
CLIENT 2
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you
cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client
2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
105
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
Figure 37 WPS: Example Network Step 3
EXISTING CONNECTION
CLIENT 1
CO
ING
XIS
ION
CT
NN
AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
SE
CU
RIT
ENROLLEE
INF
AP2
6.10.8.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It
does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices
simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by
pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it
successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to
a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the
registrar device to the enrollee devices. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar
device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you
can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device
must also support WPA2-PSK).
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button
on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled
device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the
“correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a
possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices
simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not
have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and
look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the
106
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a
rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the
MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If
there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
107
Chapter 6 Wireless LAN
108
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Home Networking
7.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices
are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.
Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.
LAN
DSL
7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens
• Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your
ADSL Router (Section 7.2 on page 111).
• Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers
based on their MAC Addresses (Section 7.3 on page 113).
• Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the ADSL Router (Section 7.4 on
page 114).
• Use the IP Alias screen (Section 7.5 on page 114) to change your ADSL Router’s IP alias
settings.
• Use the IPv6 LAN Setup screen (Section 7.6 on page 115) to configure the IPv6 settings on
your ADSL Router’s LAN interface.
7.1.2 What You Need To Know
7.1.2.1 About LAN
IP Address
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
109
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Subnet Mask
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
DHCP
A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your ADSL Router an IP address,
subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a networking device before you can access it.
7.1.2.2 About UPnP
Identifying UPnP Devices
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP
compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a
UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP
network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the
network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions.
NAT traversal allows the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the Chapter 11 on page 155 for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening
firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also
be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For
security reasons, the ADSL Router allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration.
Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
110
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™
Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD)
1.0.
Finding Out More
See Section 7.7 on page 119 for technical background information on LANs.
7.1.3 Before You Begin
Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client
List screen.
7.2 The LAN Setup Screen
Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address, subnet mask and advanced networking
settings such as RIP, multicast of your ADSL Router. Click Network Setting > Home Networking
to open the LAN Setup screen.
Figure 38 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
111
Chapter 7 Home Networking
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 24 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
LAN IP Setup
IP Address
Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your ADSL Router in dotted decimal
notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
Subnet Mask
Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example
255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your ADSL Router automatically computes the subnet
mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are
instructed to do so.
Dynamic Route
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information
with other routers. Select the RIP version from RIP1 and RIP2.
Direction
Use this field to control how much routing information the VDSL Router sends and
receives on the subnet. Select the RIP Direction from None, Both, IN Only and
OUT Only.
Multicast
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a multicast group. The ADSL Router supports IGMP v1/IGMP v2/
IGMP v3. Select None to disable it.
IGMP Snooping
Select Enabled to activate IGMP Snooping. This allows the ADSL Router to passively
learn memberships in multicast groups. Otherwise, select Disabled to deactivate it.
DHCP Server State
DHCP
If set to Enable, your ADSL Router can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway
and DNS servers to Windows 95, Windows NT and other systems that support the
DHCP client.
If set to Disable, the DHCP server will be disabled.
If set to DHCP Relay, the ADSL Router acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays
DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP
address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this
case.
When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:
IP Addressing Values
Beginning IP Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Pool Size
This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool.
DHCP Server Lease Time
Lease Time
This field specifies the lease time in seconds of an IP address assigned by the DHCP
server.
DNS Values
DNS
Select Dynamic to have the ADSL Router pass a DNS (Domain Name System) server
IP address to the DHCP clients.
Select Static and enter the DNS server IP address(es) in the fields below, if you know
the IP address.
112
DNS Server 1/2
Enter the IP address of your primary/secondary DNS server.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
Advanced Setup
Click this to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your
LAN setup.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
7.3 The Static DHCP Screen
This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on
their MAC Addresses.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is
assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Use this screen to change your ADSL Router’s static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting >
Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen.
Figure 39 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new static lease Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
Active
This field displays whether the client is connected to the ADSL Router.
MAC Address
The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is
unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is
assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other
adapter has a similar address.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.
Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the selected entry.
If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP
entry, the following screen displays.
Figure 40 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
113
Chapter 7 Home Networking
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAC Address
If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the MAC address of
a computer on your LAN.
IP Address
If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the IP address that
you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will
also specify.
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
7.4 The UPnP Screen
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for
simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a
network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network.
In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
See page 110 for more information on UPnP.
Use the following screen to enable or disable the UPnP function on your ADSL Router. Click
Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next.
Figure 41 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
UPnP
Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to
open the web configurator's login screen without entering the ADSL Router's IP address
(although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator).
Otherwise, select Disable to deactivate UPnP.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
7.5 The IP Alias Screen
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same
Ethernet interface. The ADSL Router supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical
Ethernet interface with the ADSL Router itself as the gateway for the LAN network.
114
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical
network (subnet).
7.5.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen
Use this screen to change your ADSL Router’s IP alias settings. Click Network Setting > Home
Networking > IP Alias to open the following screen.
Figure 42 Network Setting > Home Networking > IP Alias
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 28 Network Setting > Home Networking > IP Alias
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Alias
Select Enable to configure a LAN network for the ADSL Router.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of your ADSL Router in dotted decimal notation.
IP Subnet Mask
Your ADSL Router will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address
that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask
computed by the ADSL Router.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
7.6 The IPv6 LAN Setup Screen
Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings for your ADSL Router’s LAN interface. See Appendix E
on page 283 for background information about IPv6.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
115
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Figure 43 Network Setting > Home Networking > IPv6 LAN Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
116
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Table 29 Network Setting > Home Networking > IPv6 LAN Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IPv6 LAN Setup
Link Local Address
Type
Select Manual to manually enter a link local address. Select EUI64 to use the EUI-64
format to generate a link local address from the Ethernet MAC address.
IPv6 Address
If you selected Manual in the Link Local Address Type field, enter the LAN IPv6
address you want to assign to your ADSL Router in hexadecimal notation, for example,
fe80::1 (factory default).
Prefix
Enter the address prefix to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address
compose the network address.
MLD Snooping
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the
presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of
multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Enabled to activate
MLD Snooping on the ADSL Router. This allows the ADSL Router to check MLD packets
passing through it and learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce
multicast traffic.
Lan Global Identifier
Type
Select Manual to manually enter a LAN Identifier as the interface ID to identify the
LAN interface. The LAN Identifier is appended to the IPv6 address prefix to create the
routable global IPv6 address. Select EUI64 to use the EUI-64 format to generate an
interface ID from the Ethernet MAC address.
Lan Identifier
If you selected Manual, enter the LAN Identifier in this field. The LAN identifier should
be unique and 64 bits in hexadecimal form. Every 16 bit block should be separated by
a colon as in XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX where X is a hexadecimal character. Blocks of
zeros can be represented with double colons as in XXXX:XXXX::XXXX.
LAN IPv6 Address Setting
Delegate prefix from
WAN
Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service
provider or an uplink router.
Static
Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the ADSL Router’s LAN IPv6
address.
Static IPv6 Address
Prefix
If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 address prefix that the ADSL Router
uses for the LAN IPv6 address.
Prefix length
If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length that the ADSL Router
uses to generate the LAN IPv6 address.
An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left)
in the address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the
IPv6 subnet mask.
Preferred Lifetime
Enter the preferred lifetime for the prefix.
Valid Lifetime
Enter the valid lifetime for the prefix.
RADVD Setup
Send RA on
Select this to have the ADSL Router send router advertisement messages to the LAN
hosts.
Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast
advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters, such as
IPv6 prefix and DNS information.
Router solicitation is a request from a host to locate a router that can act as the
default router and forward packets.
Note: The LAN hosts neither generate global IPv6 addresses nor communicate with
other networks if you disable this feature.
Delegate M/O flag
from WAN
Select this to have the ADSL Router obtain the M/O (Managed/Other) flag setting from
the service provider or uplink router.
Manual
Select this to specify the M/O flag setting manually.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
117
Chapter 7 Home Networking
LABEL
Managed config
flag on
DESCRIPTION
Select this to have the ADSL Router indicate to hosts to obtain network settings (such
as prefix and DNS settings) through DHCPv6.
Clear this to have the ADSL Router indicate to hosts that DHCPv6 is not available and
they should use the prefix in the router advertisement message.
Other config flag
on
Select this to have the ADSL Router indicate to hosts to obtain DNS information
through DHCPv6.
Clear this to have the ADSL Router indicate to hosts that DNS information is not
available in this network.
Advertisement
interval option on
Select this to have the Router Advertisement messages the VDSL Router sends specify
the allowed interval between Router Advertisement messages.
Hop limit
Enter the maximum number of network segments that a packet can cross before
reaching the destination. When forwarding an IPv6 packet, IPv6 routers are required
to decrease the Hop Limit by 1 and to discard the IPv6 packet when the Hop Limit is 0.
Possible value for this field are 0-255.
Router Lifetime
Enter the time in seconds that hosts should consider the ADSL Router to be the default
router. Possible values for this field are 0-9000.
Router Preference
Select the router preference (Low, Medium or High) for the ADSL Router. The ADSL
Router sends this preference in the router advertisements to tell hosts what
preference they should use for the ADSL Router. This helps hosts to choose their
default router especially when there are multiple IPv6 router in the network.
Note: Make sure the hosts also support router preference to make this function work.
Reachable Time (ms)
Enter the time in milliseconds that can elapse before a neighbor is detected. Possible
values for this field are 0-3600000.
Retrans Timer (ms)
Enter the time in milliseconds between neighbor solicitation packet retransmissions.
Possible values for this field are 1000-4294967295.
RA Interval
Enter the time in seconds between router advertisement messages. Possible values for
this field are 4-1800.
Delegate MTU from
WAN
Select this to have the ADSL Router obtain the MTU setting from the service provider
or uplink router.
Manual
Select this to specify the MTU manually.
MTU
The Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each IPv6 data packet, in
bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the ADSL
Router divides it into smaller fragments.
DAD attempts
Specify the number of DAD (Duplicate Address Detection) attempts before an IPv6
address is assigned to the ADSL Router LAN interface. Possible values for this field are
1-7.
DHCPv6
118
DHCPv6 Server
Use this field to Enable or Disable DHCPv6 server on the ADSL Router.
DNSv6 Mode
Select the DNS role (Proxy or Relay) that you want the ADSL Router to act in the
IPv6 LAN network. Alternatively, select Manual and specify the DNS servers’ IPv6
address in the fields below.
Primary DNS
This field is available if you choose Manual as the DNSv6 mode. Enter the first DNS
server IPv6 address the ADSL Router passes to the DHCP clients.
Secondary DNS
This field is available if you choose Manual as the DNSv6 mode. Enter the second DNS
server IPv6 address the ADSL Router passes to the DHCP clients.
Information refresh
time
Enter the number of seconds a DHCPv6 client should wait before refreshing
information retrieved from DHCPv6.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
7.7 Home Networking Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
7.7.1 LANs, WANs and the ADSL Router
The actual physical connection determines whether the ADSL Router ports are LAN or WAN ports.
There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN
network as shown next.
Figure 44 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
LAN
WAN
7.7.2 DHCP Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ADSL Router as a DHCP
server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ADSL Router provides the TCP/IP
configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on
your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.
IP Pool Setup
The ADSL Router is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool).
Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers.
7.7.3 DNS Server Addresses
DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a
computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are
passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.
• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when
you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in
the DHCP Setup screen.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
119
Chapter 7 Home Networking
• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of
IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS
servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The ADSL Router
supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.
Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It
does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If
your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the
DHCP Setup screen.
7.7.4 LAN TCP/IP
The ADSL Router has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to
systems that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN
share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the ADSL
Router. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses
specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's
say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from
192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers
specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that
network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for
instance, 192.168.1.1, for your ADSL Router, but make sure that no other device on your network
is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ADSL Router will
compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need
to change the subnet mask computed by the ADSL Router unless you are instructed to do
otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
120
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private Internets” and RFC 1466,
“Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
7.7.5 RIP Setup
RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other
routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to:
• Both - the ADSL Router will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP
information that it receives.
• In Only - the ADSL Router will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received.
• Out Only - the ADSL Router will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets
received.
• None - the ADSL Router will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received.
The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the
ADSL Router sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported; but
RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an
unusual network topology.
Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B
uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. Multicasting can reduce the load on
non-router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not
receive the RIP packets. However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network
must use multicasting, also.
7.7.6 Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient)
or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of
hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an
improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. IGMP version 3
supports source filtering, reporting or ignoring traffic from specific source address to a particular
host on the network. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability
between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP
address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The
address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address
224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
121
Chapter 7 Home Networking
(including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The
address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group.
At start up, the ADSL Router queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership.
After that, the ADSL Router periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/
disabled on the ADSL Router LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN).
Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.
122
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Static Route
8.1 Overview
The ADSL Router usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the
LAN to the Internet. To have the ADSL Router send data to devices not reachable through the
default gateway, use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the ADSL Router’s LAN interface.
The ADSL Router routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the ADSL Router’s default
gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router
R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3
connected to the LAN.
Figure 45 Example of Static Routing Topology
R1
LAN
WAN
R3
R2
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
123
Chapter 8 Static Route
8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens
• Use the Static Route screens (Section 8.2 on page 124) to view and configure IP static routes
on the ADSL Router.
• Use the IPv6 Static Route screens (Section 8.3 on page 125) to view and configure IPv6 static
routes on the ADSL Router.
8.2 The Static Route Screen
Use this screen to view the static route rules. Click Network Setting > Static Route to open the
Static Route screen.
Figure 46 Network Setting > Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 30 Network Setting > Static Route
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new static
route
Click this to configure a new static route.
This is the number of an individual static route.
Destination IP
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number.
Gateway
This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same
network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to
their destinations.
Subnet Mask
This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.
Metric
This is the number of transmission hops between this ADSL Router and the destination.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the ADSL
Router.
Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the ADSL Router. A window displays
asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
8.2.1 Static Route Add/Edit
Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new Static Route Entry in the Routing
screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
124
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Static Route
Figure 47 Network Setting > Static Route Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Network Setting > Static Route Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Destination IP
Address
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet
mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be
identical to the host ID.
IP Subnet Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same
network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to
their destinations.
Metric
Enter the number of transmission hops (routers) that need to accross from the ADSL
Router to the destination.
OK
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
8.3 IPv6 Static Route
Use this screen to view the IPv6 static route rules. Click Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6
Static Route to open the IPv6 Static Route screen.
Figure 48 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new static
route
Click this to configure a new IPv6 static route.
This is the number of an individual static route.
Destination
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
125
Chapter 8 Static Route
Table 32 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Prefix Length
An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in
the address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6
subnet mask.
Device
This specifies the LAN or WAN PVC.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the ADSL
Router.
Click the Remove icon to remove a static route from the ADSL Router. A window displays
asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
8.3.1 IPv6 Static Route Edit
Use this screen to configure the required information for an IPv6 static route. Click Add new static
route or select an IPv6 static route index number and click Edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 49 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 33 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Destination IPv6
Address
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a prefix
length of 128 in the prefix length field to force the network number to be identical to the
host ID.
IPv6 Prefix Length Enter the address prefix to specify how many most significant bits compose the network
address.
126
PVC IPv6 Address
Select the interface through which the traffic is routed.
OK
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Quality of Service (QoS)
9.1 Overview
Use the QoS screen to set up your ADSL Router to use QoS for traffic management.
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to control bandwidth. QoS allows the ADSL Router to group and
prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance.
Without QoS, all traffic data are equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This
can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical
applications such as video-on-demand.
The ADSL Router assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets
assigned with a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priorities if there is
congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications
include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in
delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem
such as Internet radio or streaming video.
In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 50 Mbps.
You configure a classifier to assign the highest priority queue (6) to VoIP traffic from the LAN
interface, so that voice traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Traffic from
the boss’s IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) is mapped to queue 5. Traffic that does not
match these two classes are assigned priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on
the ADSL Router.
Figure 50 QoS Example
VoIP: Queue 6
DSL
50 Mbps
Boss: Queue 5
IP=192.168.1.23
9.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens
• Use the General screen (Section 9.2 on page 128) to enable QoS on the ADSL Router, and
specify the type of scheduling.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
127
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
• Use the Queue screen (Section 9.3 on page 129) to configure QoS settings on the ADSL Router.
• Use the Class Setup screen (Section 9.4 on page 131) to configure QoS settings on the ADSL
Router.
• Use the Game List screen (Section 9.5 on page 135) to to give priority to traffic for specific
games.
9.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS
802.1p
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given
the same priority. 802.1p is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of
traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use 802.1p to give different priorities to
different packet types.
Tagging and Marking
In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value
and IEEE 802.1p priority level in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible
network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or
service based on the tag or marker.
Finding Out More
See Section 9.6 on page 136 for advanced technical information on QoS.
9.2 The Quality of Service General Screen
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth.
Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next.
Figure 51 Network Setting > QoS > General
128
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Network Setting > QoS > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active QoS
Use this field to turn on QoS to improve your network performance.
Traffic priority will be
automatically assigned by
Select how the ADSL Router assigns priorities to various incoming and outgoing
traffic flows.
•
•
•
•
None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the ADSL Router put packets
into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not
match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with
the lowest priority.
Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p
priority level.
IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of
the TOS field in the IP header.
Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size.
Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet
gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are
usually best effort data packets like file transfers.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
9.3 The Queue Screen
Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment disciplines and priorities.
Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue to open the screen as shown next.
Figure 52 Network Setting > QoS > Queue
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Network Setting > QoS > Queue
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is
active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active.
Name
This shows the descriptive name of this queue.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
129
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 35 Network Setting > QoS > Queue
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Interface
This shows the name of the ADSL Router’s interface through which traffic in this queue passes.
Priority
This shows the priority of this queue.
Weight
This shows the weight of this queue.
Rate Limit
This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the queue.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one
when you take this action.
9.3.1 Adding a QoS Queue
Click the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue.
Figure 53 Queue Setup: Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 36 Queue Setup: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select to enable or disable this queue.
Name
Enter the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface
Select the interface to which this queue is applied.
This field is read-only if you are editing the queue.
Priority
Select the priority level (from 1 to 3) of this queue.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority
queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is
congested.
Weight
Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue.
If two queues have the same priority level, the ADSL Router divides the bandwidth across
the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth
than queues with smaller weights.
130
Rate Limit
Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue.
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
9.4 The Class Setup Screen
Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows
according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number,
destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select
traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
You can give different priorities to traffic that the ADSL Router forwards out through the WAN
interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low
priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications.
Click Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup to open the screen as shown next.
Figure 54 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new Classifier
Click this to create a new classifier.
Index
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active.
From Interface
This shows the interface from which traffic of this class should come.
Classification
Criteria
This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the type and the source MAC
address of traffic that matches this classifier.
DSCP Mark
This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.
802.1P/1Q Mark
This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level and 802.1Q VLAN tag assigned to traffic of this
classifier.
To Queue
This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up
by one when you take this action.
9.4.1 Class Setup Add/Edit
Click Add new Classifier in the Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup screen or click the Edit
icon next to a class, the screen appears as shown next.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
131
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Figure 55 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit
132
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rule Index
Select the rule’s index number from the drop-down list box.
Class Configuration
Active
Use this field to enable or disable the QoS class rule.
Ether Type
Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic.
If you select IPv4 or IPv6, you also need to configure source or destination IP address,
MAC address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.
If you select ARP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address.
If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID.
Interface
Select an interface if you want to classify the traffic received by it.
To Queue
Select a queue that applies to this class.
You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already.
Criteria Configuration
Basic
From
Interface
If you select From LAN in the Interface field, you can select specific interface(s) from
which traffic is received. ra0 ~ ra3 means wireless interfaces WLAN0 to WLAN3.
If you select From WAN in the Interface field, you can select a specific WAN connection
(PVC0~PVC2) from which traffic is received.
Source
IP Address
Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet
Netmask/
Source Prefix
Length
Enter the source subnet mask if you select IPv4 as the Ether Type.
Port Range
If you select TCP/UDP, TCP or UDP in the IP protocol field, select the check box and
enter the port number(s) of the source.
MAC Address
Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
Mac Netmask
Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter the source prefix length if you select IPv6 as the Ether Type.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be
of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this
classifier.
Destination
IP Address
Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
IP address means any destination IP address.
Subnet
Netmask/
Destination
Prefix Length
Enter the destination subnet mask if you select IPv4 as the Ether Type.
Port Range
If you select TCP/UDP, TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and
enter the port number(s) of the source.
MAC Address
Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Enter the destination prefix length if you select IPv6 as the Ether Type.
133
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 38 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
Mac Netmask
DESCRIPTION
Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be
of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this
classifier.
Others
IP Protocol
This field is available only when you select IPv4 or IPv6 in the Ether Type field.
If you select IPv4, select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP/
UDP, TCP, UDP or ICMP.If you select IPv6, select this option and select the protocol
(service type) from TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP or ICMPv6.
TCP ACK
This field is available only when you select TCP in the IP protocol field.
If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge)
flag.
Packet Length
This field is available only when you select IPv4 or IPv6 in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500)
in the fields provided.
IPP/DS Field
Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services.
Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range.
IP Precedence
Range
Enter a range from 0 to 7 for IP precedence. 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest.
Type of
Service
Select a type of service from the drop-down list box.
Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput,
Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost.
DSCP Range
Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in
the field provided.
802.1P
Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list
box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VLAN ID
Select this option and enter the source VLAN ID in this field.
Exclude
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this
classifier.
Action
Forward To
Select the interface through which traffic that matches the rule is forwarded out. If you
select Unchange, the ADSL Router forwards traffic of this class according to the default
routing table.
If traffic of this class comes from a WAN interface and is in a queue that forwards traffic
through the LAN/WLAN interface, the ADSL Router ignores the setting here.
IPP/DS Field
Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services.
Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range.
IP Precedence
Mark
134
Enter a range from 0 to 7 to re-assign IP precedence to matched traffic. 0 is the lowest
priority and 7 is the highest.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 38 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
Type Of
Service Mark
DSCP
Mark(0~63)
DESCRIPTION
Select a type of service to re-assign the priority level to matched traffic.
Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput,
Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost.
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the ADSL Router replaces the DSCP
field in the packets.
If you select Unchange, the ADSL Router keep the DSCP field in the packets.
802.1Q Tag
If you select Remark, select a priority level (in the Ethernet Priority field) and enter a
VLAN ID number (in the VLAN ID field) with which the ADSL Router replaces the IEEE
802.1p priority field and VLAN ID of the frames.
If you select Remove, the ADSL Router deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before
forwarding them out.
If you select Add, the ADSL Router treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second
priority level and VLAN ID that you specify in the Ethernet Priority and VLAN ID fields.
If you select Same, the ADSL Router keep the Ethernet Priority and VLAN ID in the
packets.
To configure the Ethernet Priority, you can either select a priority number in the first
drop-down list box (7 is the highest and 0 is the lowest priority) or select an application
from the second drop-down list box which automatically maps to the corresponding
priority number. (Key Net Traffic: 7; Voice: 6; Video: 5;IGMP: 4; Key Data: 3)
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
9.5 The QoS Game List Screen
Use this screen to give priority to traffic for specific games. Click Network Setting > QoS > Game
List to open the screen as shown next.
Figure 56 Network Setting > QoS > Game List
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
135
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Network Setting > QoS > Game List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Game List
Select this to have QoS give the highest priority to traffic for the games you specify. This
priority is higher than the other QoS queues.
Select the games below.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore previously saved settings.
9.6 QoS Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
9.6.1 IEEE 802.1p
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The
following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates
the 802.1p).
Table 40 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL
TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 7
Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Level 6
Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in
delay).
Level 5
Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Level 4
Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network
Architecture) transactions.
Level 3
Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important
business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2
This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Level 1
This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed
but that should not affect other applications and users.
Level 0
Typically used for best-effort traffic.
9.6.2 IP Precedence
Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a
layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP
header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is
the lowest priority level and seven is the highest.
136
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
9.6.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment
If you enable QoS on the ADSL Router, the ADSL Router can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p
priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match
a class.
The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the ADSL Router.
On the ADSL Router, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in
lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Table 41 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
LAYER 2
LAYER 3
PRIORITY
QUEUE
IEEE 802.1P USER
PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE)
DSCP
000000
000000
>1100
001110
250~1100
IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
001100
001010
001000
010110
010100
010010
010000
011110
<250
011100
011010
011000
100110
100100
100010
100000
101110
101000
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
110000
111000
137
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
138
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
10
Network Address Translation (NAT)
10.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the ADSL Router. NAT (Network Address Translation
- NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source
address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within
another network.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens
• Use the General screen (Section 10.2 on page 140) to activate/deactivate NAT for the default
WAN connection (PVC0).
• Use the Port Forwarding screen (Section 10.3 on page 141) to configure forward incoming
service requests to the server(s) on your local network.
• Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 10.4 on page 144).
10.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT
Inside/Outside
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ADSL Router, for example, the
computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the
outside hosts.
Global/Local
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
139
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP,
that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network
appear as a single computer to the outside world.
Finding Out More
See Section 10.5 on page 144 for advanced technical information on NAT.
10.2 The NAT General Screen
Use this screen to activate NAT for the default WAN connection (PVC0). Click Network Setting >
NAT to open the following screen.
Note: You must create an IP filter rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from
the WAN to be forwarded through the ADSL Router.
Figure 57 Network Setting > NAT > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 Network Setting > NAT > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select this check box to enable NAT.
Max NAT/Firewall
Session Per User
When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, they
need to establish NAT sessions. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single
client can establish, this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used. In
this case, no additional NAT sessions can be established, and users may not be able to
access the Internet.
Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to limit the
number of NAT/Firewall sessions client computers can establish through the ADSL
Router.
If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you can
raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of
NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of users using peer
to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no single client is exhausting
all of the available NAT sessions.
140
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
10.3 The Port Forwarding Screen
Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP
address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can
support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to
specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or
a range of ports.
The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix F on page 293. Please refer
to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Default Server IP Address
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default
server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the ADSL Router discards all
packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management
setup.
Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 58 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
A=192.168.1.33
WAN
LAN
B=192.168.1.34
192.168.1.1
C=192.168.1.35
IP Address assigned by ISP
D=192.168.1.36
10.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen
Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
141
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
See Appendix F on page 293 for port numbers commonly used for particular services.
Note: Make sure NAT is activated on the WAN connection before you configure a port
forwarding rule for it. For the default WAN connection (PVC0), activate NAT in the
Network Setting > NAT > General screen. For other WAN connections
(PVC1~PVC7), activate NAT for an individual WAN connection in the Broadband >
More Connections > Edit screen.
Figure 59 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 43 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface
Select a WAN connection for which you want to configure a port forwarding rule.
Add new rule
Click this button to add a rule to the table below.
This is the rule index number (read-only).
Active
This field indicates whether the rule is active or not.
Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Service Name
This is a service’s name.
External Start Port
This is the first port number of a port range that incoming service requests may use to
access the service in your local network.
External End Port
This is the last port number of a port range that incoming service requests may use to
access the service in your local network.
Internal Start Port
This is the starting port number that the device translates for the service in your local
network.
Internal End Port
This is the ending port number that the device translates for the service in your local
network.
Server IP Address
This is the server’s IP address in your local network.
Modify
Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule.
Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note that subsequent
address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.
10.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Add/Edit
Use this screen to add or edit a port forwarding rule. Click the Add new rule button or a rule’s edit
icon in the Port Forwarding screen to display the screen as shown next.
142
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Figure 60 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 44 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Click this check box to enable the rule.
Service Name
Enter a name to identify this port-forwarding rule.
External Start
Port
Enter a port number in this field.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in
the End Port field.
External End Port
Enter a port number in this field.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then
enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the
port number in the Start Port field above.
Server IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the server in your local network.
Trigger Protocol
Select the protocol of the service, TCP, UDP or ALL (TCP+UDP).
Open Start Port
Enter the first port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming
port. For a range of ports, you only need to enter the first number of the range to which
you want the incoming ports translated, the device automatically calculates the last port of
the translated port range.
Open End Port
Enter the last port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming
port. For a range of ports, you only need to enter the first number of the range to which
you want the incoming ports translated, the device automatically calculates the last port of
the translated port range.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
143
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
10.4 The DMZ Screen
If you need to allow packets from a specific WAN connection to your local network, NAT supports a
default server IP address. A default server receives packets from the specified WAN connection and
the ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen.
Figure 61 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 45 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface
Select a WAN PVC connection (PVC0~PVC7) from which you want to forward the traffic
to the specified default server.
Default Server
Address
Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not
specified in the NAT > Port Forwarding screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the ADSL Router discards all
packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding
screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
10.5 NAT Technical Reference
This chapter contains more information regarding NAT.
10.5.1 NAT Definitions
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ADSL Router, for example, the
computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the
outside hosts.
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address
of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in
144
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP
address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table
summarizes this information.
Table 46 NAT Definitions
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Inside
This refers to the host on the LAN.
Outside
This refers to the host on the WAN.
Local
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN.
Global
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN.
NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
10.5.2 What NAT Does
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note
that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP.
In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local
network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Manyto-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping – see Table 47 on page 147), NAT offers the
additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your ADSL Router filters out all
incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on
IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT).
10.5.3 How NAT Works
Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets,
the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global
Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination
address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local)
IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It
replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and
Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The
ADSL Router keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can
have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
145
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Figure 62 How NAT Works
NAT Table
LAN
Inside Local
IP Address
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.12
SA
SA
192.168.1.10
IGA1
Inside Local
Address (ILA)
192.168.1.11
Inside Global
IP Address
IGA 1
IGA 2
IGA 3
IGA 4
WAN
Inside Global
Address (IGA)
192.168.1.10
10.5.4 NAT Application
The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs
using IP alias) behind the ADSL Router can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.
Figure 63 NAT Application With IP Alias
10.5.5 NAT Mapping Types
NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:
• One to One: In One-to-One mode, the ADSL Router maps one local IP address to one global IP
address.
146
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
• Many to One: In Many-to-One mode, the ADSL Router maps multiple local IP addresses to one
global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for instance, PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL’s
Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported (the SUA Only option in
today’s routers).
• Many to Many Overload: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the ADSL Router maps the multiple
local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
• Many-to-Many No Overload: In Many-to-Many No Overload mode, the ADSL Router maps
each local IP address to a unique global IP address.
• Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be
accessible to the outside world.
Port numbers do NOT change for One-to-One and Many-to-Many No Overload NAT mapping
types.
The following table summarizes these types.
Table 47 NAT Mapping Types
TYPE
IP MAPPING
One-to-One
ILA1 IGA1
Many-to-One (SUA/PAT)
ILA1 IGA1
ILA2 IGA1
…
Many-to-Many Overload
ILA1 IGA1
ILA2 IGA2
ILA3 IGA1
ILA4 IGA2
…
Many-to-Many No Overload
ILA1 IGA1
ILA2 IGA2
ILA3 IGA3
…
Server
Server 1 IP IGA1
Server 2 IP IGA1
Server 3 IP IGA1
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
147
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
148
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
11
Port Binding
11.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure the port binding settings.
Port binding allows you to aggregate port connections into logical groups. You may bind WAN PVCs
to Ethernet ports and WLANs to specify how traffic is forwarded. Different ATM QoS settings can be
specified for each WAN PVC to meet bandwidth requirements for the type of traffic to be
transferred.
For example, three port binding groups could be created on the device (R1) for three different WAN
PVC connections. The first PVC (PVC0) is for non time-sensitive data traffic. The second and third
PVCs (PVC1 and PVC2) are for time sensitive Media-On-Demand (MOD) video traffic and VoIP
traffic, respectively.
Figure 64 Port Binding Groups
Data
PVC0
R1
PVC1
VoIP
R1
S1
S2
MOD
PVC2
R1
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
149
Chapter 11 Port Binding
If a WAN PVC is bound to an ethernet port, traffic from the ethernet port will only be forwarded
through the specified WAN PVC and vice versa. If a port is not in a port binding group, traffic to and
from the port will be forwarded according to the routing table. See the tutorial section (Section 4.10
on page 65) for more details on configuring port binding for multiple WAN connections.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens
• Use the General screen (Section 11.3 on page 150) to activate port binding.
• Use the Port Binding screen (Section 11.3 on page 150) to set up port binding groups.
• Use the Port Binding Summary screen (Section 11.3.1 on page 151) to view configured port
binding groups.
11.2 The Port Binding General Screen
Use this screen to activate port binding and set up port binding groups. Click Network Setting >
Port Binding to display the following screen.
Figure 65 Network Setting > Port Binding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Network Setting > Port Binding
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Activated Port Binding Activate or deactivate the port binding feature.
Apply
Add the selected port binding group configuration.
11.3 The Port Binding Screen
Use this screen to set up port binding groups. Click Network Setting > Port Binding > Port
Binding to display the following screen.
150
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Port Binding
Figure 66 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 49 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port Binding
Active
Activate or deactivate port binding for the port binding group.
Group Index
Select the index number for the port binding group.
When a port is assigned to a port binding group, traffic will be forwarded to the other
ports in the group, but not to ports in other groups. If a port is not included in any
groups, traffic will be forwarded according to the routing table.
ATM VCs
Select the ATM VC (PVC) to include in the port binding group. Each ATM VC can only
be bound to one group.
Ethernet
Select the Ethernet (Eth) ports to include in the port binding group. Each Ethernet
port can only be bound to one group.
Wireless LAN
Select the WLAN (AP) connection to include in the port binding group. Additional APs
can be enabled on the More AP screen (Section 6.3 on page 86).
Group Summary
Port Binding
Summary
Click this to view a summary of configured port binding groups.
Apply
Add the selected port binding group configuration.
Delete
Delete the selected port binding group configuration.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
11.3.1 Port Binding Summary Screen
Use this screen to view configured port binding groups.
In the Port Binding screen, click the Port Binding Summary button in the Group Summary
section to display the following screen.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
151
Chapter 11 Port Binding
Figure 67 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding Summary
Ex
mp
le
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding Summary
152
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Group ID
This field displays the group index number.
Group port
This field displays the ports included in the group.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
12
Dynamic DNS Setup
12.1 Overview
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic
DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access
your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance
myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an
IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for
people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name.
The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen
Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 12.2 on page 153) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS
settings on the ADSL Router.
12.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same
IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example,
www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
12.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen
Use this screen to change your ADSL Router’s DDNS. Click Network Setting > Dynamic DNS.
The screen appears as shown.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
153
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS Setup
Figure 68 Network Setting > Dynamic DNS
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 51 Network Setting > Dynamic DNS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS Setup
Active Dynamic
DNS
Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.
Service Provider
This is the website of your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Host Name
Type the domain name assigned to your ADSL Router by your Dynamic DNS provider.
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").
154
Username
Type your user name.
Password
Type the password assigned to you.
Enable Wildcard
Option
Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
13
Filters
13.1 Overview
This chapter introduces three types of filters supported by the ADSL Router. You can configure rules
to restrict traffic by IP addresses, MAC addresses, IPv6 addresses and/or URLs.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens
• Use the IP/MAC Filter screen (Section 13.2 on page 155) to create IP and MAC filter rules.
• Use the IPv6/MAC Filter screen (Section 13.3 on page 157) to create IPv6 and MAC filter rules.
13.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering
URL
The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) identifies and helps locates resources on a network. On the
Internet the URL is the web address that you type in the address bar of your Internet browser, for
example “http://www.zyxel.com”.
URL and IP Filter Structure
The URL, IP and IPv6 filters have individual rule indexes. The ADSL Router allows you to configure
each type of filter with its own respective set of rules.
13.2 The IP/MAC Filter Screen
Use this screen to create and apply IP and MAC filters. Click Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter.
The screen appears as shown.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
155
Chapter 13 Filters
Figure 69 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rule Type
Rule Type selection
Select White List to specify traffic to allow and Black List to specify traffic to
disallow.
IP / MAC Filter Rule Editing
IP / MAC Filter Rule Index
Select the index number of the filter rule.
Active
Use this field to enable or disable the filter rule.
Interface
Select the PVC to which to apply the filter.
Direction
Apply the filter to Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction.
Rule Type
Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule.
Use the IP Filter to block or allow traffic by IP addresses.
Use the MAC Filter to block or allow traffic by MAC address.
156
Source IP Address
Enter the source IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is
ignored if it is 0.0.0.0.
Subnet Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask for the source IP address
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Filters
Table 52 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port Number
Enter the source port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of this
field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0.
Destination IP Address
Enter the destination IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is
ignored if it is 0.0.0.0.
Subnet Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask for the destination IP address.
Port Number
Enter the destination port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of
this field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0.
Protocol
Select ICMP, TCP or UDP for the upper layer protocol.
IP / MAC Filter Listing
IP / MAC Filter Rule Index
Select the index number of the filter set from the drop-down list box.
This is the index number of the rule in a filter set.
Active
This field shows whether the rule is activated.
Interface
This is the interface that the filter set applies to.
Direction
The filter set applies to this traffic direction.
Src IP/Mask
This is the source IP address and subnet mask when you select IP as the rule
type.
Dest IP/Mask
This is the destination IP address and subnet mask.
Mac Address
This is the MAC address of the packets being filtered.
Src Port
This is the source port number.
Dest Port
This is the destination port number.
Protocol
This is the upper layer protocol.
Apply
Click this to apply your changes.
Delete
Click this to remove the filter rule.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
13.3 IPv6/MAC Filter
Use this screen to create and apply IPv6 filters. Click Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter. The
screen appears as shown.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
157
Chapter 13 Filters
Figure 70 Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 53 Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rule Type
Rule Type selection
Select White List to specify traffic to allow and Black List to specify traffic to
block.
IPv6 / MAC Filter Rule Editing
IPv6 / MAC Filter Rule Index
Select the index number of the filter rule.
Active
Use this field to enable or disable the filter rule.
Interface
Select the PVC to which to apply the filter.
Direction
Apply the filter to Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction.
Rule Type
Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule.
Use the IP Filter to block or allow traffic by IPv6 addresses.
Use the MAC Filter to block or allow traffic by MAC address.
158
Source IP Address
Enter the source IPv6 address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is
ignored if it is ::.
Source Prefix Length
Enter the prefix length for the source IPv6 address
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Filters
Table 53 Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Destination IPv6 Address
Enter the destination IPv6 address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is
ignored if it is ::.
Destination Prefix Length
Enter the prefix length for the destination IPv6 address.
ICMPv6 Type
Select the ICMPv6 message type to filter. The following message types can be
selected:
1 / Destination Unreachable: 0 - no route to destination; 1 communication with destination administratively prohibited; 3 - address
unreachable; 4 - port unreachable
2 / Packet Too Big
3 / Time Exceeded: 0 - hop limit exceeded in transit; 1 - fragment
reassembly time exceeded
4 / Parameter Problem: 0 - erroneous header field encountered; 1 unrecognized Next Header type encountered; 2 - unrecognized IPv6 option
encountered
128 / Echo Request
129 / Echo Response
130 / Listener Query - Multicast listener query
131 / Listener Report - Multicast listener report
132 / Listener Done - Multicast listener done
143 / Listener Report v2 - Multicast listener report v2
133 / Router Solicitation
134 / Router Advertisement
135 / Neighbor Solicitation
136 / Neighbor Advertisement
137 / Redirect - Redirect message
Protocol
This is the (upper layer) protocol that defines the service to which this rule
applies. By default it is ICMPv6.
IPv6 / MAC Filter Listing
IPv6 / MAC Filter Rule Index
Select the index number of the filter set from the drop-down list box.
This is the index number of the rule in a filter set.
Active
This field shows whether the rule is activated.
Interface
This is the interface that the rule applies to.
Direction
The filter set applies to this traffic direction.
ICMPv6 Type
The ICMPv6 message type to filter.
Src IP/PrefixLength
This displays the source IPv6 address and prefix length.
Dest IP/PrefixLength
This displays the destination IPv6 address and prefix length.
Mac Address
This is the MAC address of the packets being filtered.
Protocol
This is the (upper layer) protocol that defines the service to which this rule
applies. By default it is ICMPv6.
Apply
Click this to apply your changes.
Delete
Click this to remove the filter rule.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
159
Chapter 13 Filters
160
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
14
Firewall
14.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable the ADSL Router firewall. Use the firewall to protect your
ADSL Router and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. The
firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN.
• blocks SYN and port scanner attacks.
By default, the ADSL Router blocks DDOS, LAND and Ping of Death attacks whether the firewall is
enabled or disabled.
The following figure illustrates the firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging)
session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However
other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4).
Figure 71 Default Firewall Action
WAN
LAN
14.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens
• Use the General screen (Section 14.2 on page 164) to select the firewall protection level on the
ADSL Router.
• Use the Default Action screen (Section 14.3 on page 165) to set the default action that the
firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules.
• Use the Rules screen (Section 14.4 on page 166) to view the configured firewall rules and add,
edit or remove a firewall rule.
• Use the Dos screen (Section 14.5 on page 172) to set the thresholds that the ADSL Router uses
to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established (half-open
sessions).
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
161
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall
SYN Attack
A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the
targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that
follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYNACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates
the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests,
making the system unavailable for legitimate users.
DoS
Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the
Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer
have access to network resources. The ADSL Router is pre-configured to automatically detect and
thwart all known DoS attacks.
DDoS
A Distributed DoS (DDoS) attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single
target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system.
LAND Attack
In a Local Area Network Denial (LAND) attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a
spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent
the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to
itself.
Ping of Death
Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum
65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or
reboot.
SPI
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is
valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the
WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN.
RFC 4890 SPEC Traffic
RFC 4890 specifies the filtering policies for ICMPv6 messages. This is important for protecting
against security threats including DoS, probing, redirection attacks and renumbering attacks that
can be carried out through ICMPv6. Since ICMPv6 error messages are critical for establishing and
maintaining communications, filtering policy focuses on ICMPv6 informational messages.
162
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
Anti-Probing
If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ADSL Router, an ICMP response
packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the ADSL Router exists. The
ADSL Router supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This
keeps outsiders from discovering your ADSL Router when unsupported ports are probed.
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a message control and error-reporting protocol
between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams,
but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application
user.
DoS Thresholds
For DoS attacks, the ADSL Router uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not
become fully established. These thresholds apply globally to all sessions. You can use the default
threshold values, or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
163
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.2 The Firewall General Screen
Use this screen to select the firewall protection level on the ADSL Router. Click Security >
Firewall > General to display the following screen.
Figure 72 Security > Firewall > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Security > Firewall > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
High
This setting blocks all traffic to and from the Internet. Only local network traffic and LAN to WAN
service (Telnet, FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, DNS, POP3, SMTP) is permitted.
Medium
This is the recommended setting. It allows traffic to the Internet but blocks anyone from the
Internet from accessing any services on your local network.
Low
This setting allows traffic to the Internet and also allows someone from the Internet to access
services on your local network. This would be used with Port Forwarding, Default Server.
Custom
This setting allows the customer to create and edit individual firewall rules.
Firewall rules can be created in the Default Action screen (Section 14.3 on page 165) and Rules
screen (Section 14.4 on page 166).
164
Off
This setting is not recommended. It disables firewall protection for your network and could
potentially expose your network to significant security risks. This option should only be used for
troubleshooting or if you intend using another firewall in conjunction with your ZyXEL router.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.3 The Default Action Screen
Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of
the firewall rules. Click Security > Firewall > Default Action to display the following screen.
Figure 73 Security > Firewall > Default Action
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Security > Firewall > Default Action
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Packet Direction
This is the direction of travel of packets (LAN to Router, LAN to WAN, WAN to Router,
WAN to LAN).
Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.
For example, LAN to Router means packets traveling from a computer/subnet on the
LAN to the ADSL Router itself.
Default Action
Use the drop-down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is to take on
packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the firewall
rules.
Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP
destination-unreachable message to the sender.
Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet (for a TCP packet) or an
ICMP destination-unreachable message (for a UDP packet) to the sender.
Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
165
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.4 The Rules Screen
Click Security > Firewall > Rules to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the
configured firewall rules. Note the order in which the rules are listed.
Note: The firewall configuration screen shown in this section is specific to the following
devices: P-The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn.
Figure 74 Security > Firewall > Rules
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Security > Firewall > Rules
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Firewall Rules Storage
Space in Use
This read-only bar shows how much of the ADSL Router's memory for recording
firewall rules it is currently using. When you are using 80% or less of the storage
space, the bar is green. When the amount of space used is over 80%, the bar is red.
Packet Direction
Use the drop-down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you
want to configure firewall rules.
Create a new rule
after rule number
Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected
index number. For example, if you select “6”, your new rule becomes number 7 and
the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule 8.
The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to
traffic traveling in the selected packet direction. The firewall rules that you configure
(summarized below) take priority over the general firewall action settings in the
General screen.
166
This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are
applied in turn.
Active
This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not. Select the check box to
enable the rule. Clear the check box to disable the rule.
Source IP Address
This column displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this
firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is
equivalent to Any.
Destination IP Address
This column displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this
firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is
equivalent to Any.
Service
This column displays the services to which this firewall rule applies. See Appendix F
on page 293 for more information.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
Table 56 Security > Firewall > Rules
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Action
This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets (Drop), discards
packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message
to the sender (Reject) or allows the passage of packets (Permit).
Source Interface
This column displays the source interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is
the interface through which the traffic entered the ADSL Router. Please note that a
blank source interface is equivalent to Any.
Destination Interface
This column displays the destination interface to which this firewall rule applies. This
is the interface through which the traffic is destined to leave the ADSL Router. Please
note that a blank source interface is equivalent to Any.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule. A window displays asking
you to confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule. Note that subsequent firewall
rules move up by one when you take this action.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
14.4.1 The Rules Add Screen
Use this screen to configure firewall rules. In the Rules screen, select an index number and click
Add or click a rule’s Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information
on the labels.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
167
Chapter 14 Firewall
Figure 75 Security > Firewall > Rules > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 Security > Firewall > Rules > Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select this option to enable this firewall rule.
Action for Matched
Packets
Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (Drop), deny and send an
ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (Reject) or allow the
passage of (Permit) packets that match this rule.
IP Version Type
Select the IP version, IPv4 or IPv6, to apply this firewall rule to.
Rate Limit
Set a maximum number of packets per second, minute, or hour to limit the
throughput of traffic that matches this rule.
Maximum Burst
Number
Set the maximum number of packets that can be sent at the peak rate.
Log
This field determines if a log for packets that match the rule is created or not.
Rules/Destination Address
168
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
Table 57 Security > Firewall > Rules > Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Address Type
Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular (single) IP, a range of IP
addresses (for instance, 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address?
Select an option from the drop-down list box that includes: Single Address, Range
Address, Subnet Address and Any Address.
Start IP Address
Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here.
End IP Address
Enter the ending IP address in a range here.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable.
Source Mac Address
Specify a source MAC address of traffic to which to apply this firewall rule applies.
Please note that a blank source MAC address is equivalent to any.
Source Interface
Specify a source interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface
through which the traffic entered the ADSL Router. Please note that a blank source
interface is equivalent to any.
Destination Interface
Specify a destination interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface
through which the traffic is destined to leave the ADSL Router. Please note that a
blank source interface is equivalent to any.
Services
Available Services
Please see Appendix F on page 293 for more information on services available. Select
a service from the Available Services box.
Edit Customized
Service
Click the Edit Customized Service button to bring up the screen that you use to
configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services.
TCP Flag
Specify any TCP flag bits the firewall rule is to check for.
Schedule
Select the days and time during which to apply the rule. Select Everyday and All
Day to always apply the rule.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
14.4.2 Customized Services
Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the ADSL Router. For a
comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number
Authority) website. See Appendix F on page 293 for some examples. Click the Edit Customized
Services button while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port. This displays the
following screen.
Figure 76 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
169
Chapter 14 Firewall
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 58 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the number of your customized port.
Name
This is the name of your customized service.
Protocol
This shows the IP protocol (TCP or UDP) that defines your customized service.
Port Type
This is the port number or range that defines your customized service.
Start Port
This is a single port number or the starting port number of a range that defines your
customized service.
End Port
This is a single port number or the ending port number of a range that defines your customized
service.
Modify
Click this to edit a customized service.
Add
Click this to configure a customized service.
Back
Click this to return to the Firewall Edit Rule screen.
14.4.3 Customized Service Add/Edit
Use this screen to add a customized rule or edit an existing rule. Click Add or the Edit icon next to
a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to display the following screen.
Figure 77 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 59 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Config
Service Name
Type a unique name for your custom port.
Service Type
Choose the IP port (TCP or UDP) that defines your customized port from the drop down list
box.
Port Configuration
Type
170
Click Single to specify one port only or Port Range to specify a span of ports that define
your customized service.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
Table 59 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port Number
Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized
service.
Back
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
Delete
Click this to delete the current rule.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
171
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.5 The DoS Screen
Use this screen to enable DoS protection. Click Security > Firewall > Dos to display the following
screen.
Figure 78 Security > Firewall > Dos
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 60 Security > Firewall > Dos
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Denial of Services
Enable this to protect against DoS attacks. The ADSL Router will drop sessions that
surpass maximum thresholds.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
Advanced
Click this to go to a screen to specify maximum thresholds at which the ADSL Router will
start dropping sessions.
14.5.1 The DoS Advanced Screen
For DoS attacks, the ADSL Router uses thresholds to determine when to start dropping sessions
that do not become fully established (half-open sessions). These thresholds apply globally to all
sessions.
For TCP, half-open means that the session has not reached the established state-the TCP three-way
handshake has not yet been completed. Under normal circumstances, the application that initiates
a session sends a SYN (synchronize) packet to the receiving server. The receiver sends back an ACK
(acknowledgment) packet and its own SYN, and then the initiator responds with an ACK
(acknowledgment). After this handshake, a connection is established.
Figure 79 Three-Way Handshake
For UDP, half-open means that the firewall has detected no return traffic. An unusually high number
(or arrival rate) of half-open sessions could indicate a DOS attack.
172
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.5.1.1 Threshold Values
If everything is working properly, you probably do not need to change the threshold settings as the
default threshold values should work for most small offices. Tune these parameters when you
believe the ADSL Router has been receiving DoS attacks that are not recorded in the logs or the
logs show that the ADSL Router is classifying normal traffic as DoS attacks. Factors influencing
choices for threshold values are:
The maximum number of opened sessions.
The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network.
The CPU power of servers in your LAN network.
Network bandwidth.
Type of traffic for certain servers.
Reduce the threshold values if your network is slower than average for any of these factors
(especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy).
• If you often use P2P applications such as file sharing with eMule or eDonkey, it’s recommended
that you increase the threshold values since lots of sessions will be established during a small
period of time and the ADSL Router may classify them as DoS attacks.
14.5.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds
Click Security > Firewall > DoS > Advanced to display the following screen.
Figure 80 Security > Firewall > DoS > Advanced
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
173
Chapter 14 Firewall
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 61 Security > Firewall > DoS > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
TCP SYN-Request
Count
This is the rate of new TCP half-open sessions per second that causes the firewall to
start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises
above this number, the ADSL Router deletes half-open sessions as required to
accommodate new connection attempts.
UDP Packet Count
This is the rate of new UDP half-open sessions per second that causes the firewall to
start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises
above this number, the ADSL Router deletes half-open sessions as required to
accommodate new connection attempts.
ICMP Echo-Request
Count
This is the rate of new ICMP Echo-Request half-open sessions per second that causes
the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection
attempts rises above this number, the ADSL Router deletes half-open sessions as
required to accommodate new connection attempts.
Back
Click this button to return to the previous screen.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
14.6 Firewall Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
14.6.1 Firewall Rules Overview
Your customized rules take precedence and override the ADSL Router’s default settings. The ADSL
Router checks the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic
against the firewall rules (in the order you list them). When the traffic matches a rule, the ADSL
Router takes the action specified in the rule.
Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply:
• LAN to Router
• WAN to LAN
• LAN to WAN
• WAN to Router
Note: The LAN includes both the LAN port and the WLAN.
By default, the ADSL Router’s stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following
directions:
• LAN to Router
These rules specify which computers on the LAN can manage the ADSL Router (remote
management).
Note: You can also configure the remote management settings to allow only a specific
computer to manage the ADSL Router.
174
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
• LAN to WAN
These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the
WAN.
By default, the ADSL Router’s stateful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following
directions:
• WAN to LAN
These rules specify which computers on the WAN can access which computers or services on the
LAN.
Note: You also need to configure NAT port forwarding (or full featured NAT address
mapping rules) to allow computers on the WAN to access devices on the LAN.
• WAN to Router
By default the ADSL Router stops computers on the WAN from managing the ADSL Router. You
could configure one of these rules to allow a WAN computer to manage the ADSL Router.
Note: You also need to configure the remote management settings to allow a WAN
computer to manage the ADSL Router.
You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme
caution in doing so.
For example, you may create rules to:
• Block certain types of traffic, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the LAN to the Internet.
• Allow certain types of traffic, such as Lotus Notes database synchronization, from specific hosts
on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN.
• Allow everyone except your competitors to access a web server.
• Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the LAN.
These custom rules work by comparing the source IP address, destination IP address and IP
protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator. Your customized rules take
precedence and override the ADSL Router’s default rules.
14.6.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall
Change the default password via web configurator.
Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way.
Limit who can access your router.
Don't enable any local service (such as telnet or FTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could
present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse
the enabled services to access the firewall or the network.
10 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to
communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the
services at specific interfaces.
11 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
175
Chapter 14 Firewall
12 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room.
14.6.3 Security Considerations
Note: Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security
risks to the ADSL Router and your protected network. Use caution when creating or
deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them.
Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule:
Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet? For example, if IRC
is blocked, are there users that require this service?
Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, will
a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective?
Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security
vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the Internet to the LAN,
Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers.
Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?
Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of entering the
information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens.
14.6.4 Triangle Route
When the firewall is on, your ADSL Router acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the
Internet. In an ideal network topology, all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through
the ADSL Router to protect your LAN against attacks.
Figure 81 Ideal Firewall Setup
LAN
WAN
14.6.4.1 The “Triangle Route” Problem
A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices. You
may have more than one connection to the Internet (through one or more ISPs). If an alternate
gateway is on the LAN (and its IP address is in the same subnet as the ADSL Router’s LAN IP
address), the “triangle route” (also called asymmetrical route) problem may occur. The steps below
describe the “triangle route” problem.
176
A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on
the WAN.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
The ADSL Router reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the WAN.
The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the ADSL
Router.
As a result, the ADSL Router resets the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged.
Figure 82 “Triangle Route” Problem
WAN
LAN
ISP 1
ISP 2
14.6.4.2 Solving the “Triangle Route” Problem
If you have the ADSL Router allow triangle route sessions, traffic from the WAN can go directly to a
LAN computer without passing through the ADSL Router and its firewall protection.
Another solution is to use IP alias. IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections
over the same Ethernet interface. Your ADSL Router supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with
the ADSL Router being the gateway for each logical network.
It’s like having multiple LAN networks that actually use the same physical cables and ports. By
putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass
through the ADSL Router to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario.
A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the
WAN.
The ADSL Router reroutes the packet to Gateway A, which is in Subnet 2.
The reply from the WAN goes to the ADSL Router.
The ADSL Router then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
177
Chapter 14 Firewall
Figure 83 IP Alias
Subnet 1
LAN
WAN
ISP 1
ISP 2
Subnet 2
178
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
15
Parental Control
15.1 Overview
Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time
periods and days during which the ADSL Router performs parental control on a specific user.
15.2 The Parental Control Screen
Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules.
Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen.
Figure 84 Security > Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 62 Security > Parental Control
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Parental Control
Use this field to activate or deactivate parental control.
Add new PCP
Click this to create a new parental control rule.
This is the index number of the rule.
Status
This indicates whether the rule is active or not.
A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not
active.
PCP Name
This shows the name of the rule.
Home Network User
This shows the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this rule applies.
Internet Access
Schedule
This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled.
Network Service
This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
179
Chapter 15 Parental Control
Table 62 Security > Parental Control (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Website Blocked
This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
15.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule
Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to
an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL
filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites.
Figure 85 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule
180
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 63 Parental Control: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
Active
Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule.
Parental Control
Profile Name
Enter a descriptive name for the rule.
Home Network User
Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If
you select Custom, enter the LAN user’s MAC address. If you select All, the rule
applies to all LAN users.
Internet Access Schedule
Day
Select check boxes for the days that you want the ADSL Router to perform parental
control.
Time of Day to Apply
Enter the starting and ending time that the LAN user is allowed access.
Network Service
Network Service
Setting
If you select Block, the ADSL Router prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites
with the URLs listed below.
If you select Access, the ADSL Router blocks access to all URLs except ones listed
below.
Add new service
Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure
the Service Name, Protocol, and Name of the new rule.
Active
This shows whether a configured service is activated or not.
Service Name
This shows the name of the rule.
Protocol
This shows the protocol of the rule.
Port
This shows the port of the rule.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Blocked Site/URL
Enter the URL of web sites or URL keywords to which the ADSL Router blocks access.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
181
Chapter 15 Parental Control
182
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
16
Certificate
16.1 Overview
The ADSL Router can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are
based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public
key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Local Certificates screen to view and import the ADSL Router’s CA-signed certificates
(Section 16.3 on page 183).
• The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the ADSL Router (Section
16.4 on page 185).
16.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Certification Authority
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government
certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone
can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the ADSL
Router to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and
then send the certification requests to a certification authority.
Certificate File Format
The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
• PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to
convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.
16.3 Local Certificates
Use this screen to view the ADSL Router’s summary list of certificates and certification requests.
You can import the following certificates to your ADSL Router:
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
183
Chapter 16 Certificate
• Web Server - This certificate secures HTTP connections.
• SSH - This certificate secures remote connections.
Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen.
Figure 86 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 64 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates
184
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WebServer
Click Browse... to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Current File
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended
that you give each certificate a unique name.
Subject
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as
CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization
or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have
unique subject information.
Issuer
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing
certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or
department, organization or company and country.
Valid From
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text
displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not
yet become applicable.
Valid To
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red
and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to
expire or has already expired.
Cert
Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As
screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.
SSH
Type in the location of the SSH certificate file you want to upload in this field or
click Browse to find it.
Current File
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended
that you give each certificate a unique name.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Certificate
Table 64 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Key Type
This field applies to the SSH certificate.
This shows the file format of the current certificate.
Replace
Click this to replace the certificate(s) and save your changes back to the ADSL
Router.
Reset
Click this to clear your settings.
16.4 The Trusted CA Screen
Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have
set the ADSL Router to accept as trusted. The ADSL Router accepts any valid certificate signed by a
certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any
certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities.
Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen.
Figure 87 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 65 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Import Certificate
Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification
authority that you trust to the ADSL Router.
Name
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as
Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State
(ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject
information.
Type
This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a
Certification Authority signed the certificate.
Action
Click View to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate.
Click Remove to delete the certificate.
16.5 Trusted CA Import
Click Import Certificate in the Trusted CA screen to open the Import Certificate screen. You
can save a trusted certification authority’s certificate to the ADSL Router.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
185
Chapter 16 Certificate
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import
the certificate.
Figure 88 Trusted CA > Import
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Import
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Certificate File
Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to
find it.
Browse
Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Apply
Click Apply to save the certificate on the ADSL Router.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
16.6 View Certificate
Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate, change
the certificate’s name and set whether or not you want the ADSL Router to check a certification
authority’s list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification
authority.
Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen. Click the View icon
to open the View Certificate screen.
Figure 89 Trusted CA: View
186
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Trusted CA: View
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Certificate Name
This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to
change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You
may use any character (not including spaces).
Certificate Detail
This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in
Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert
the binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or
colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save
the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for
example).
Back
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Click this to return to the previous screen.
187
Chapter 16 Certificate
188
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
17
Logs
17.1 Overview
The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the
ADSL Router log and then display the logs or have the ADSL Router send them to an administrator
(as e-mail) or to a syslog server.
17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select (Section 17.2 on
page 190).
17.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Alerts and Logs
An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks
(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System
Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log
screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Syslog Overview
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to
syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog
message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog
facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for
details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
Table 68 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE
SEVERITY
Emergency: The system is unusable.
Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
Critical: The system condition is critical.
Error: There is an error condition on the system.
Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
189
Chapter 17 Logs
Table 68 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE
SEVERITY
Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
17.2 The System Log Screen
Click System Monitor > Log to open the System Log screen. Use the System Log screen to see
the system logs for the categories that you select in the upper left drop-down list box.
Figure 90 System Monitor > Log > System Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 69 System Monitor > Log > System Log
190
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Level
Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to
the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the ADSL Router searches
through all logs of that severity or higher.
Refresh
Click this to renew the log screen.
Clear Logs
Click this to delete all the logs.
Export
Click this to download logs to a file on your computer.
Email Log Now
Click this to send logs to a specified e-mail address.
This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time
This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Level
This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Message
This field states the reason for the log.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
18
Traffic Status
18.1 Overview
Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN, LAN
interfaces and NAT.
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 18.2 on page 191) .
• Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 18.3 on page 192).
• Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the ADSL Router’s client(s) (Section 18.4 on page
193).
18.2 The WAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. You can view the WAN traffic
statistics in this screen.
Figure 91 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 70 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Status
This shows the number of bytes received and sent through the WAN interface of the ADSL
Router.
Refresh Interval
Select how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen from the drop-down list
box.
Connected
Interface
This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
191
Chapter 18 Traffic Status
Table 70 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Packets Sent
Data
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
Data
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
18.3 The LAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. You can view the LAN
traffic statistics in this screen.
Figure 92 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 71 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
192
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh
Interval(s)
Select how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen from the dropdown list box.
Set Interval
Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh
Interval field.
Stop
Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
Interface
This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Bytes Sent
This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
Bytes Received
This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
Interface
This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Traffic Status
Table 71 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Sent (Packet)
Data
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Received (Packet)
Data
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
18.4 The NAT Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT to open the following screen. You can view the NAT
status of the ADSL Router’s client(s) in this screen.
Figure 93 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 72 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Select how often you want the ADSL Router to update this screen from the drop-down list
box.
Set Interval
Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field.
Stop
Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
Device Name
This shows the name of the client.
IP Address
This shows the IP address of the client.
MAC Address
This shows the MAC address of the client.
No. of Open
Session
This shows the number of NAT sessions used by the client.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
193
Chapter 18 Traffic Status
194
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
19
User Account
19.1 Overview
You can configure system password for different user accounts in the User Account screen.
19.2 The User Account Screen
Use the User Account screen to configure system password.
Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen.
Figure 94 Maintenance > User Account
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 73 Maintenance > User Account
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Name
You can configure the password for the Power User and Admin accounts.
Old Password
Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this
field.
New Password
Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password,
the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use
the new password to access the ADSL Router.
Retype to
Confirm
Type the new password again for confirmation.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
195
Chapter 19 User Account
196
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
20
TR-069 Client
20.1 Overview
The ADSL Router supports TR-069 Amendment 1 (CPE WAN Management Protocol Release 2.0) and
TR-069 Amendment 2 (CPE WAN Management Protocol v1.1, Release 3.0).
TR-069 is a protocol that defines how your ADSL Router (ZD) can be managed via a management
server (MS) such as ZyXEL’s Vantage Access.
Figure 95 LAN and WAN
ZD
MS
An administrator can use a management server to remotely set up the ADSL Router, modify
settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the ADSL Router.
In order to use CWMP, you need to configure the following steps:
Activate CWMP
Specify the URL, username and password.
Activate periodic inform and specify an interval value.
20.2 The TR-069 Client Screen
Use this screen to configure your ADSL Router to be managed by a management server. Click
Matinenance > TR-069 Client to display the following screen.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
197
Chapter 20 TR-069 Client
Figure 96 Maintenance > TR-069 Client
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 74 Maintenance > TR-069 Client
198
LINK
DESCRIPTION
CWMP
Select Enable to allow the ADSL Router to be managed by a management server or select
Disable to not allow the ADSL Router to be managed by a management server.
ACS URL
Type the IP address or domain name of the management server. If the ADSL Router is
behind a NAT router that assigns it a private IP address, you will have to configure a NAT
port forwarding rule on the NAT router.
ACS User Name
The user name is used to authenticate the ADSL Router when making a connection to the
management server. This user name on the management server and the ADSL Router must
be the same. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an Englishlanguage keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed.
ACS Password
The password is used to authenticate the ADSL Router when making a connection to the
management server. This password on the management server and the ADSL Router must
be the same. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an Englishlanguage keyboard.
Connection
Request Path
Type the IP address or domain name of the ADSL Router. The management server uses this
path to verify the ADSL Router.
Connection
Request Port
The default port for access to the ADSL Router from the management server is port 7547. If
you change it, make sure it does not conflict with another port on your network and it is
recommended to use a port number above 1024 (not a commonly used port). The
management server should use this port to connect to the ADSL Router. You may need to
alter your NAT port forwarding rules if they were already configured.
Connection
Request
UserName
The user name is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the
ADSL Router. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an Englishlanguage keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed.
Connection
Request
Password
The password is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the ADSL
Router. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language
keyboard. Spaces are not allowed.
Inform
Select Enable to have the ADSL Router periodically send information to the management
server (recommended if CWMP is enabled) or select Disable to not have the ADSL Router
periodically send information to the management server
Inform Interval
The interval is the duration in seconds for which the ADSL Router must attempt to connect
with the management server to send information and check for configuration updates. Enter
a value between 1 and 86400 seconds.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 20 TR-069 Client
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
199
Chapter 20 TR-069 Client
200
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
21
System Settings
21.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password,
name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
21.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens
• Use the System screen (Section 21.2 on page 201) to configure system settings.
• Use the Time Setting screen (Section 21.3 on page 201) to set the system time.
21.2 The System Screen
Use this screen to configure system admin password.
Click Maintenance > System to open the screen as shown.
Figure 97 Maintenance > System
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 75 Maintenance > System
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Administrator
Inactivity Timer
Type how many seconds a management session (either via the web configurator) can be
left idle before the session times out and you have to log in again. Very long idle timeouts
may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no
matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended).
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
21.3 The Time Screen
Use this screen to configure the ADSL Router’s time based on your local time zone. To change your
ADSL Router’s time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time. The screen appears as
shown.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
201
Chapter 21 System Settings
Figure 98 Maintenance > System > Time
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 76 Maintenance > System > Time
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Date/Time
Current Time
This field displays the time and date of your ADSL Router.
Each time you reload this page, the ADSL Router synchronizes the time and date with
the time server.
Time and Date Setup
Manual
Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new
time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date
you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect
it.
Current Date/Time
This field displays the last updated time (in hh:mm:ss format) from the time server or
the last time configured manually.
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and
then click Apply.
Current Time
This field displays the last updated date (in yyyy/mm/dd format) from the time server
or the last date configured manually.
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and
then click Apply.
Get from Time
Server
Select this radio button to have the ADSL Router get the time and date from the time
server you specified below.
Time Server
Address 1/2
Enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time
server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone
202
Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your
time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 21 System Settings
Table 76 Maintenance > System > Time (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Daylight Savings
Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their
clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the
evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable
Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type
2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of
the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same
moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last,
Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In
Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour
ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable
Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each
time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So
in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the
o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of
the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same
moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last,
Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone.
In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour
ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
203
Chapter 21 System Settings
204
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
22
Firmware Upgrade
22.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your ADSL Router. You can download new
firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your
device’s performance.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your ADSL Router.
22.2 The Firmware Screen
Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the
system will reboot.
Do NOT turn off the ADSL Router while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 99 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Firmware
Version
This is the present Firmware version.
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find
it.
Browse...
Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the ADSL Router
again.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
205
Chapter 22 Firmware Upgrade
Figure 100 Firmware Uploading
The ADSL Router automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In
some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 101 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, an error screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firmware
Upgrade screen.
Figure 102 Error Message
206
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
23
Backup/Restore
23.1 Overview
The Backup/Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also
reset your device settings back to the factory default.
23.2 The Backup/Restore Screen
Click Maintenance > Backup/Restore. Information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.
Figure 103 Maintenance > Backup/Restore
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the ADSL Router’s current configuration to a file
on your computer. Once your ADSL Router is configured and functioning properly, it is highly
recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The
backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the ADSL Router’s current configuration to your computer.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
207
Chapter 23 Backup/Restore
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your
computer to your ADSL Router.
Table 78 Restore Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it.
Browse...
Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click this to begin the upload process.
Reset
Click this to reset your device settings back to the factory default.
Do not turn off the ADSL Router while configuration file upload is in
progress.
After the ADSL Router configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login
again to restart the ADSL Router.
The ADSL Router automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In
some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 104 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you restore the default configuration, you may need to change the IP address of your computer
to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix A on
page 233 for details on how to set up your computer’s IP address.
If the upload was not successful, an error screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Configuration screen.
Reset to Factory Defaults
Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the ADSL
Router to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.
Figure 105 Reset Warning Message
Wait until the ADSL Router’s login screen appears. You can also press the RESET button on the rear
panel to reset the factory defaults of your ADSL Router. Refer to Section 1.5 on page 18 for more
information on the RESET button.
208
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 23 Backup/Restore
23.3 The Reboot Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the ADSL Router remotely without turning the power off. You
may need to do this if the ADSL Router hangs, for example.
Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click the Reboot button to have the ADSL Router reboot. This does
not affect the ADSL Router's configuration.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
209
Chapter 23 Backup/Restore
210
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
24
Remote Management
24.1 Overview
Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which ADSL
Router interface (if any) from which computers.
The following figure shows remote management of the ADSL Router coming in from the WAN.
Figure 106 Remote Management From the WAN
LAN
WAN
HTTP
Telnet
Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you
still need to configure a IP filter rule to allow access.
You may manage your ADSL Router from a remote location via:
• Internet (WAN only)
• LAN only
• LAN and WAN
• None (Disable)
To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Service Access
field.
24.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens
• Use the WWW screen (Section 24.2 on page 212) to configure through which interface(s) and
from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the ADSL Router.
• Use the Telnet screen (Section 24.3 on page 214) to configure through which interface(s) and
from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the ADSL Router.
• Use the FTP screen (Section 24.4 on page 214) to configure through which interface(s) and from
which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the ADSL Router.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
211
Chapter 24 Remote Management
• Your ADSL Router can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and
monitor the ADSL Router through the network. Use the SNMP screen (see Section 24.5 on page
215) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use SNMP
to access the ADSL Router.
• Use the DNS screen (Section 24.6 on page 217) to configure through which interface(s) and
from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the ADSL Router.
• Use the ICMP screen (Section 24.7 on page 218) to set whether or not your ADSL Router will
respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available.
• Use the SSH screen (Section 24.8 on page 219) to configure through which interface(s) and from
which IP address(es) users can use SSH to manage the ADSL Router.
24.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management
Remote Management Limitations
Remote management does not work when:
• You have not enabled that service on the interface in the corresponding remote management
screen.
• You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens.
• The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If
it does not match, the ADSL Router will disconnect the session immediately.
• There is a firewall rule that blocks it.
Remote Management and NAT
When NAT is enabled:
• Use the ADSL Router’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.
• Use the ADSL Router’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.
24.2 The WWW Screen
Use this screen to specify how to connect to the ADSL Router from a web browser, such as Internet
Explorer.
24.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen
Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT to display the WWW screen.
212
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Remote Management
Figure 107 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > WWW
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 79 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > WWW
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router using HTTP or
HTTPS. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this
service.
Note: It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the
default password (in Maintenance > User Account). To allow access from the
WAN, you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule. See Section 4.8 on
page 60 for information on configuring firewall rules.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the ADSL
Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the ADSL Router using this service.
Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you
specify to access the ADSL Router using this service.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
213
Chapter 24 Remote Management
24.3 The Telnet Screen
You can use Telnet to access the ADSL Router’s command line interface. Specify which interfaces
allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come.
Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > Telnet tab to display the screen as shown.
Figure 108 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > Telnet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 80 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > Telnet
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router. If the number is
grayed out, it is not editable.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this
service.
Note: It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the
default password (in Maintenance > User Account). To allow access from the
WAN, you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule. See Section 4.8 on
page 60 for information on configuring firewall rules.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the ADSL
Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the ADSL Router using this service.
Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you
specify to access the ADSL Router using this service.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
24.4 The FTP Screen
You can use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to upload and download the ADSL Router’s firmware and
configuration files. Please see the User’s Guide chapter on firmware and configuration file
maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client.
214
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Remote Management
Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access
can come. To change your ADSL Router’s FTP settings, click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT >
FTP. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 109 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > FTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 81 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > FTP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router. If the number is
grayed out, it is not editable.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this
service.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the ADSL
Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the ADSL Router using this service.
Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you
specify to access the ADSL Router using this service.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
24.5 The SNMP Screen
Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information
between network devices. Your ADSL Router supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a
manager station to manage and monitor the ADSL Router through the network. The ADSL Router
supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an
SNMP management operation.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
215
Chapter 24 Remote Management
Figure 110 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the ADSL Router).
An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form
compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform
network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed
devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of
information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of
packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of
managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing
these objects.
24.5.1 Configuring SNMP
To change your ADSL Router’s SNMP settings, click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SNMP tab.
The screen appears as shown.
216
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Remote Management
Figure 111 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SNMP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 82 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SNMP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
This displays the port the SNMP agent listens on. If the number is grayed out, it is not
editable.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this
service.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to access the SNMP agent on the
ADSL Router.
Select All to allow any computer to access the SNMP agent.
Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you
specify to access the ADSL Router using this service.
Get Community
Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext
requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests.
Set Community
Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the
management station. The default is public and allows all requests.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ADSL Router.
Cancel
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
24.6 The DNS Screen
Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa.
Use this screen to set from which IP address the ADSL Router will accept DNS queries and on which
interface it can send them your ADSL Router’s DNS settings. This feature is not available when the
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
217
Chapter 24 Remote Management
ADSL Router is set to bridge mode. Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > DNS to change your
ADSL Router’s DNS settings.
Figure 112 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 83 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > DNS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router. If the
number is grayed out, it is not editable.
Access Status
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the
ADSL Router.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to
the ADSL Router.
Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the ADSL Router.
Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that
you specify to send DNS queries to the ADSL Router.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
24.7 The ICMP Screen
To change your ADSL Router’s security settings, click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > ICMP. The
screen appears as shown.
If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ADSL Router, an ICMP response
packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the ADSL Router exists. Your
ADSL Router supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This
keeps outsiders from discovering your ADSL Router when unsupported ports are probed.
Note: If you want your device to respond to pings and requests for unauthorized services,
you will also need to configure the firewall accordingly by disabling SPI.
218
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Remote Management
Figure 113 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > ICMP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 84 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > ICMP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Respond to Ping on
The ADSL Router will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is
selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to
incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming
LAN and WAN Ping requests.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to send Ping requests to the
ADSL Router.
Select All to allow any computer to send Ping requests to the ADSL Router.
Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you
specify to send Ping requests to the ADSL Router.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
24.8 The SSH Screen
You can use Secure SHell (SSH) to securely access the ADSL Router’s command line interface.
Specify which interfaces allow SSH access and from which IP address the access can come. SSH is
a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide
secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network.
Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SSH tab to display the screen as shown.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
219
Chapter 24 Remote Management
Figure 114 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SSH
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 85 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SSH
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
This displays the service port number for accessing the ADSL Router. If the number is
grayed out, it is not editable.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ADSL Router using this
service.
Note: It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the
default password (in Maintenance > User Account). To allow access from the
WAN, you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule. See Section 4.8 on
page 60 for information on configuring firewall rules.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the ADSL
Router using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the ADSL Router using this service.
Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you
specify to access the ADSL Router using this service.
Apply
Click this to save your changes.
Cancel
Click this to restore your previously saved settings.
24.8.1 SSH Example
This section shows an example using a graphical interface SSH client program to remotely access
the ZyXEL device. The configuration and connection steps are similar for most SSH client programs.
Refer to your SSH client program user’s guide.
220
Enter the IP address and port number. Select SSH.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Remote Management
A window displays prompting you to store the host key in your computer. Click Yes to continue.
Enter your user name and password.
The command line interface displays.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
221
Chapter 24 Remote Management
222
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
25
Diagnostic
25.1 Overview
These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the ADSL Router.
25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens
• Use the Ping screen (Section 25.2 on page 223) to ping an IP address.
• Use the DSL Line screen (Section 25.3 on page 224) to view the DSL line statistics and reset the
ADSL line.
25.2 The General Screen
Use this screen to ping an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping to open the screen
shown next.
Figure 115 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 86 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection.
Ping
Click this to ping the IP address that you entered.
PingV6
Click this to ping the IPv6 address that you entered.
TracerouteV6
Click this to display the route path and transmission delays between the ADSL Router to the
IPv6 address that you entered.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
223
Chapter 25 Diagnostic
25.3 The DSL Line Screen
Use this screen to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line. Click Maintenance >
Diagnostic > DSL Line to open the screen shown next.
Figure 116 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 87 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ATM Status
Click this to view your DSL connection’s Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) statistics.
ATM is a networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixedsize packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be
guaranteed.
The (Segmentation and Reassembly) SAR driver translates packets into ATM cells. It also
receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets.
These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up.
inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received.
inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected.
inF4Pkts is the number of ATM Operations, Administration, and Management (OAM) F4
cells that have been received. See ITU recommendation I.610 for more on OAM for ATM.
inF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been received.
outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have been sent.
outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected.
outF4Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F4 cells that have been sent.
outF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been sent.
ATM Loopback
Test
224
Click this to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least one PVC
with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The ADSL Router sends an OAM F5
packet to the DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the ADSL Router.
The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM
network.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 25 Diagnostic
Table 87 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DSL Line Status
Click this to view statistics about the DSL connections.
noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part of the
connection (coming into the ADSL Router from the ISP). It is measured in decibels. The
higher the number the more signal and less noise there is.
output power upstream is the amount of power (in decibels) that the ADSL Router is
using to transmit to the ISP.
attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude (in decibels) of the DSL signal
coming into the ADSL Router from the ISP.
Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) modulation divides up a line’s bandwidth into sub-carriers
(sub-channels) of 4.3125 KHz each called tones. The rest of the display is the line’s bit
allocation. This is displayed as the number (in hexadecimal format) of bits transmitted for
each tone. This can be used to determine the quality of the connection, whether a given
sub-carrier loop has sufficient margins to support certain ADSL transmission rates, and
possibly to determine whether particular specific types of interference or line attenuation
exist. Refer to the ITU-T G.992.1 recommendation for more information on DMT.
The better (or shorter) the line, the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone.
The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15. There will be
some tones without any bits as there has to be space between the upstream and
downstream channels.
Reset ADSL Line
Click this to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the progress
and results of this operation, for example:
"Start to reset ADSL
Loading ADSL modem F/W...
Reset ADSL Line Successfully!"
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
225
Chapter 25 Diagnostic
226
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
26
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
• ADSL Router Access and Login
• Internet Access
26.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The ADSL Router does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
Make sure the ADSL Router is turned on.
Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ADSL Router.
Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ADSL Router and plugged in to an
appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
Turn the ADSL Router off and on.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 27.1 on page 231.
Check the hardware connections.
Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
Turn the ADSL Router off and on.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
227
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
26.2 ADSL Router Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the ADSL Router.
The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the ADSL
Router by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most
Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the
Default Gateway might be the IP address of the ADSL Router (it depends on the network), so
enter this IP address in your Internet browser.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.5 on page
18.
I forgot the password.
The default admin user name and password can be found on the cover of this User’s Guide.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.5 on page
18.
I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator.
Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 7.2 on page 111), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the ADSL Router.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide.
Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled. See Appendix C on page 261.
Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the ADSL Router with the default IP
address. See Section 1.5 on page 18.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
228
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
• Try to access the ADSL Router using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the ADSL
Router, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the ADSL
Router does not respond to HTTP.
• If your computer is connected to the DSL port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is
connected to a ETHERNET port.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the ADSL Router.
Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default user and default admin password
can be found on the cover page of this User’s Guide. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps
Lock] is not on.
You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ADSL Router.
Log out of the ADSL Router in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
Turn the ADSL Router off and on.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.5 on page
18.
I cannot Telnet to the ADSL Router.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload
new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
26.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide and Section 27.1 on page 231.
Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are casesensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
229
Chapter 26 Troubleshooting
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless
client are the same as the settings in the AP.
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure you enabled the wireless LAN and
have selected the correct country and channel in which your ADSL Router operates in the Wireless
LAN > AP screen.
Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the ADSL Router),
but my Internet connection is not available anymore.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick
Start Guide and Section 27.1 on page 231.
Turn the ADSL Router off and on.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.
There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 27.1 on page
231. If the ADSL Router is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that
use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications.
Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving your computer closer to the
ADSL Router if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering
with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on).
Turn the ADSL Router off and on.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you
might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications.
230
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
C HAPTER
27
Product Specifications
The following tables summarize the ADSL Router’s hardware and firmware features.
27.1 Hardware Specifications
Table 88 LED Descriptions
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
Green
On
The ADSL Router is receiving power and ready for use.
Blinking
The ADSL Router is self-testing.
(POWER)
Red
On
The ADSL Router detected an error while self-testing, or there is a
device malfunction.
Off
The ADSL Router is not receiving power.
LAN 1-4
Green
On
The ADSL Router has an Ethernet connection with a device on the
Local Area Network (LAN).
Blinking
The ADSL Router is sending/receiving data to /from the LAN.
Off
The ADSL Router does not have an Ethernet connection with the
LAN.
Green
(WPS/WLAN)
Orange
Green
(DSL)
Green
On
The wireless network is activated.
Blinking
The ADSL Router is communicating with other wireless clients.
Blinking
The ADSL Router is setting up a WPS connection.
Off
The wireless network is not activated.
On
The DSL line is up.
Blinking
The ADSL Router is initializing the DSL line.
Off
The DSL line is down.
On
The ADSL Router has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a
DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if
used) and the DSL connection is up.
(INTERNET)
Red
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Blinking
The ADSL Router is sending or receiving IP traffic.
On
The ADSL Router attempted to make an IP connection but failed.
Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE
response, PPPoE authentication failed.
Off
The ADSL Router does not have an IP connection.
231
Chapter 27 Product Specifications
Table 89 LED Descriptions
LED
COLOR
POWER
Green
WPS/WLAN
DSL
INTERNET
DESCRIPTION
On
The ADSL Router is receiving power and ready for use.
Blinking
The ADSL Router is self-testing.
On
The ADSL Router detected an error while self-testing, or there is a
device malfunction.
Off
The ADSL Router is power off.
On
The ADSL Router has an Ethernet connection with a device on the
Local Area Network (LAN).
Blinking
The ADSL Router is transmitting data to or receiving data from the
LAN.
Off
The ADSL Router does not have an Ethernet connection with the
LAN.
Green
On
The wireless network is activated.
Blinking
The ADSL Router is communicating with other wireless clients.
Orange
Blinking
The ADSL Router is setting up a WPS connection.
Off
The wireless network is not activated.
On
The DSL line is up.
Red
ETHERNET 14
STATUS
Green
Green
Green
Blinking
The ADSL Router is initializing the DSL line.
Off
The DSL line is down.
On
The ADSL Router has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a
server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and
the DSL connection is up.
Red
232
Blinking
The ADSL Router is sending or receiving IP traffic.
On
The ADSL Router attempted to make an IP connection but failed.
Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE
response, PPPoE authentication failed, no IP address from IPCP.
Off
The ADSL Router does not have an IP connection.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed.
Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions
of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your
computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package.
TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and
later operating systems.
After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to
"communicate" with your network.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your
computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the ADSL Router’s LAN port.
Windows 95/98/Me
Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network
window.
Figure 117 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
233
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Installing Components
The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a
network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks.
If you need the adapter:
In the Network window, click Add.
Select Adapter and then click Add.
Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK.
If you need TCP/IP:
In the Network window, click Add.
Select Protocol and then click Add.
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK.
If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
Click Add.
Select Client and then click Add.
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK.
Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.
Configuring
In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click
Properties
Click the IP Address tab.
• If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into
the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields.
234
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 118 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address
Click the DNS Configuration tab.
• If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS.
• If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields
below (you may not need to fill them all in).
Figure 119 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration
Click the Gateway tab.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
235
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• If you do not know your gateway’s IP address, remove previously installed gateways.
• If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add.
Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window.
Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted.
Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer when prompted.
Verifying Settings
Click Start and then Run.
In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window.
Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default
gateway.
Windows 2000/NT/XP
The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme.
Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel.
Figure 120 Windows XP: Start Menu
236
In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections
in Windows 2000/NT).
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 121 Windows XP: Control Panel
Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Figure 122 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties
Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
237
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 123 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties
The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
• Click Advanced.
Figure 124 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
238
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP
Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
• In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
• In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask,
and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default
gateways.
• In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To
manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic
metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
• Click OK when finished.
Figure 125 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP
address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server
addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields.
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order
them.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
239
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 126 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
10
Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows
2000/NT).
11 Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open
Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support
tab.
Windows Vista
This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0.
240
Click the Start icon, Control Panel.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 127 Windows Vista: Start Menu
In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet.
Figure 128 Windows Vista: Control Panel
Click Network and Sharing Center.
Figure 129 Windows Vista: Network And Internet
Click Manage network connections.
Figure 130 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
241
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying
that it needs your permission to continue.
Figure 131 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties.
Figure 132 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the General tab).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically.
242
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
• Click Advanced.
Figure 133 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP
Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
• In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
• In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask,
and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default
gateways.
• In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To
manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic
metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
• Click OK when finished.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
243
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 134 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the General tab):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP
address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server
addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields.
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order
them.
244
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 135 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window.
11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
12
Close the Network Connections window.
13 Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open
Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support
tab.
Macintosh OS 8/9
Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control
Panel.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
245
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 136 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu
Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list.
Figure 137 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP
246
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list.
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your ADSL Router in the Router address box.
Close the TCP/IP Control Panel.
Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration.
Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window.
Macintosh OS X
Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window.
Figure 138 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu
Click Network in the icon bar.
• Select Automatic from the Location list.
• Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list.
• Click the TCP/IP tab.
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
247
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 139 Macintosh OS X: Network
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
• From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your ADSL Router in the Router address box.
Click Apply Now and close the window.
Turn on your ADSL Router and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window.
Linux
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0.
Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release
version.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
248
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE)
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE.
Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click
Network.
Figure 140 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices
Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device
General screen displays as shown.
Figure 141 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General
• If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and
select dhcp from the drop down list.
• If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address,
Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields.
Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
249
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration
screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.
Figure 142 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS
Click the Devices tab.
Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save
the changes in all screens.
Figure 143 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate
After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network
Configuration screen.
Using Configuration Files
Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address.
Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0
configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with
any plain text editor.
• If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure
shows an example.
250
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 144 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=dhcp
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
• If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed
by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet
mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10
and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Figure 145 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.1.10
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf
file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP
addresses are specified.
Figure 146 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf
nameserver 172.23.5.1
nameserver 172.23.5.2
After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network
restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example.
Figure 147 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart
Shutting down interface eth0:
Shutting down loopback interface:
Setting network parameters:
Bringing up loopback interface:
Bringing up interface eth0:
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
Verifying Settings
Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
251
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Figure 148 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
[root@localhost]# ifconfig
eth0
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44
inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb)
Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
252
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same
way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common
network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has
its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets
to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are
delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example,
192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary
number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in
decimal.
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are
the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
253
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Figure 149 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according
to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are
part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term “subnet” is short for “sub-network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP
address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit
in the IP address is part of the host ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host
ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
Table 90 Subnet Masks
1ST OCTET: 2ND
OCTET:
(192)
(168)
3RD
OCTET:
4TH OCTET
(1)
(2)
IP Address (Binary)
11000000
10101000
00000001
00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
Network Number
11000000
10101000
00000001
Host ID
00000010
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the
leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1” value).
For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24
bits are zeroes.
254
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following
examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks.
Table 91 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET
2ND
OCTET
3RD
OCTET
4TH OCTET
8-bit mask
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
255.0.0.0
16-bit mask
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
255.255.0.0
24-bit mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
255.255.255.0
29-bit mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111000
255.255.255.248
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have
on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of
remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit
subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that
network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of
possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 92 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK
8 bits
HOST ID SIZE
255.0.0.0
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS
24 bits
224
–2
16777214
16
–2
65534
16 bits
255.255.0.0
16 bits
24 bits
255.255.255.0
8 bits
28 – 2
29 bits
255.255.255.24
254
2 –2
3 bits
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a
continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the
number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/”
followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128.
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Table 93 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0
/24
0000 0000
255.255.255.128
/25
1000 0000
128
255.255.255.192
/26
1100 0000
192
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
255
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 93 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation (continued)
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.224
/27
1110 0000
224
255.255.255.240
/28
1111 0000
240
255.255.255.248
/29
1111 1000
248
255.255.255.252
/30
1111 1100
252
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example
a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the
company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum
of 28 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 150 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate subnetworks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25
and 192.168.1.128 /25.
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two subnetworks, A and B.
256
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Figure 151 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 – 2 or 126
possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself, all ones is the subnet’s
broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask
255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to
an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two
subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host ID
bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all
zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
Table 94 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal)
192.168.1.
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
257
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 95 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
64
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Table 96 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
128
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
Table 97 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
192
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 98 Eight Subnets
258
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
30
31
32
33
62
63
64
65
94
95
96
97
126
127
128
129
158
159
160
161
190
191
192
193
222
223
224
225
254
255
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number.
Table 99 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.255.128 (/25)
126
255.255.255.192 (/26)
62
255.255.255.224 (/27)
30
255.255.255.240 (/28)
16
14
255.255.255.248 (/29)
32
255.255.255.252 (/30)
64
255.255.255.254 (/31)
128
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number.
Table 100 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
255.255.128.0 (/17)
32766
255.255.192.0 (/18)
16382
255.255.224.0 (/19)
8190
255.255.240.0 (/20)
16
4094
255.255.248.0 (/21)
32
2046
255.255.252.0 (/22)
64
1022
255.255.254.0 (/23)
128
510
255.255.255.0 (/24)
256
254
255.255.255.128 (/25)
512
126
10
255.255.255.192 (/26)
1024
62
11
255.255.255.224 (/27)
2048
30
12
255.255.255.240 (/28)
4096
14
13
255.255.255.248 (/29)
8192
14
255.255.255.252 (/30)
16384
15
255.255.255.254 (/31)
32768
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses
specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You
must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the ADSL Router.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
259
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your ADSL Router that is
easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network
is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your ADSL Router will
compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need
to change the subnet mask computed by the ADSL Router unless you are instructed to do
otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the
guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address
Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
260
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java
Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer
versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow
pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
Disable Pop-up Blockers
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker.
Figure 152 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab.
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any
web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
261
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Figure 153 Internet Options: Privacy
Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.
262
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Figure 154 Internet Options: Privacy
Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the
prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.167.1.
Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 155 Pop-up Blocker Settings
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
263
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts
are allowed.
In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 156 Internet Options: Security
264
Click the Custom Level... button.
Scroll down to Scripting.
Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
Click OK to close the window.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Figure 157 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Click the Custom Level... button.
Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
Click OK to close the window.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
265
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Figure 158 Security Settings - Java
JAVA (Sun)
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
Make sure that Use Java 2 for  under Java (Sun) is selected.
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 159 Java (Sun)
266
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Mozilla Firefox
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary.
You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the
screen that appears.
Figure 160 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options
Click Content to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen.
Figure 161 Mozilla Firefox Content Security
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
267
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
268
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of
computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within
range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an
ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example
of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 162 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a
wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless
client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is
disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with
each other.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
269
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Figure 163 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access
point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection
between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only
provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the
immediate neighborhood.
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated
wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.
270
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Figure 164 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data.
Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your
region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce
interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing
interference and degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should
be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For
example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to
select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not
within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are
within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they
cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
271
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Figure 165
RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the
channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of
data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest
size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is
invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station
that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for
permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other
stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms
with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and
the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the
RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be
fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes)
that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data
frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while
you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you
set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames
will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
272
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of
the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending
data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short
preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network
support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide
more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the
network support it, otherwise the ADSL Router uses long preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b
adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or
lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the
maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 101 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE (MBPS)
MODULATION
DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11
CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/48/
54
OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless
clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the ADSL Router are data encryption, wireless client
authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ADSL Router identity.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
273
Appendix D Wireless LANs
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on
your ADSL Router.
Table 102 Wireless Security Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL
Least
Secure
SECURITY TYPE
Unique SSID (Default)
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Most Secure
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ADSL Router and on all
wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to
support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It
is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x
are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for
centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional
authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless
clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and
accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server
handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the
network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
274
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the
wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point
sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS
server for user accounting:
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret
key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the
shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from
unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and
LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types.
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE
802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP
to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a
RADIUS server perform authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that
supports IEEE 802.1x.
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain
the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used
to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
275
Appendix D Wireless LANs
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server
sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client ‘proves’ that it knows the password by
encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in
plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get
the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the
authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an
authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication.
Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You
must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for
mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of
the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done
in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive
attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which
imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the serverside authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending
username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client
authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then
use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the
clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5,
EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the
wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is
generated each time reauthentication is performed.
276
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless
security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while
dynamic WEP is enabled.
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic
keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public
deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a
comparison of the features of authentication types.
Table 103 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
EAP-MD5
EAP-TLS
EAP-TTLS
PEAP
LEAP
Mutual Authentication
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Certificate – Client
No
Yes
Optional
Optional
No
Certificate – Server
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Dynamic Key Exchange
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Credential Integrity
None
Strong
Strong
Strong
Moderate
Deployment Difficulty
Easy
Hard
Moderate
Moderate
Moderate
Client Identity Protection
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
WPA and WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a
wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management
than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user
authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use
WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use
WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into
each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless
client will be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on
whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less
secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity
Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but
offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter
mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
277
Appendix D Wireless LANs
called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check
(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is
never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key
hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption
keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless
clients. This all happens in the background automatically.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets,
altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the
receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is
assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity
checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi
network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference
between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific
credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force
password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent,
single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal
encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of
WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate
wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange
messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a
network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and
pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless
devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication
with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not
need to go with the authentication process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an
AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless
client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch
for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client.
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero
Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it.
278
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812),
and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server
looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.
The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies
network access accordingly.
A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS
server and the client.
The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and
management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The
keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and
the wireless clients.
Figure 166 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must
consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and
symbols).
The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password
matches.
The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not
sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
279
Appendix D Wireless LANs
The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information
exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data
exchanged between them.
Figure 167 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each
authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on
how you configure these security features.
Table 104 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
ENCRYPTIO
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL N METHOD
ENTER
MANUAL KEY
IEEE 802.1X
Open
No
Disable
None
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Open
Shared
WEP
WEP
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Yes
Disable
WPA
TKIP/AES
No
Enable
WPA-PSK
TKIP/AES
Yes
Disable
WPA2
TKIP/AES
No
Enable
WPA2-PSK
TKIP/AES
Yes
Disable
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to
the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by
capturing RF signals from the air.
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
280
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a)
is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna’s coverage
area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width.
Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately
2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of
approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal
power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna
that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the
antenna provides.
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The
coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room
environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage
areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light
from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles
typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional
antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In
point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to
each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For
omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP
application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
281
Appendix D Wireless LANs
282
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
IPv6
Overview
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
Link-local Address
A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a
“private IP address” in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a
device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast
address format is as follows.
Table 105 Link-local Unicast Address Format
1111 1110 10
Interface ID
10 bits
54 bits
64 bits
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
283
Appendix E IPv6
Global Address
A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a “public IP address” in
IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3.
Unspecified Address
An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does
not have its own address. It is similar to “0.0.0.0” in IPv4.
Loopback Address
A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to
“127.0.0.1” in IPv4.
Multicast Address
In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses.
Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts
in a multicast group.
Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a
predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast
addresses.
Table 106 Predefined Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1
All hosts on a local node.
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2
All routers on a local node.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1
All hosts on a local connected link.
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2
All routers on a local connected link.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2
All routers on a local site.
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3
All DHCP severs on a local site.
The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned
to a multicast group.
Table 107 Reserved Multicast Address
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
284
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix E IPv6
Table 107 Reserved Multicast Address (continued)
MULTICAST ADDRESS
FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
Interface ID
In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an
Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One
interface should have a unique interface ID.
EUI-64
The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and
fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC
address. See the following example.
MAC
EUI-64
02
00
: 13
: 49
: 12
: 34
: 56
: 13
: 49
: FF
: FE
: 12
: 34
: 56
Stateless Autoconfiguration
With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated.
Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful
autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses don’t need to be maintained by a DHCP
server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when
IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own
Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address.
When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address
(beginning with fe80).
When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the ADSL Router is set to
automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 3another
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
285
Appendix E IPv6
address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the
router. This is a routable global IP address.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol
that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other
configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages
using UDP.
Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for
identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC
address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with
the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device.
Identity Association
An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which
the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with
exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration
from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP
information.
The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an
identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary
addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The
DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to
extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client
sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If
the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any
available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's
discretion.
T2
T1
Renew Renew
to S1
to S1
Renew Renew
to S1
to S1
Renew
to S1
Renew
to S1
Rebind
to S2
Rebind
to S2
DHCP Relay Agent
A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages
between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a wellknown multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent
to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network.
The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID
option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string,
3.
286
In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix E IPv6
such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the
VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply
messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the
interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to
the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts.
Prefix Delegation
Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the
ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The ADSL Router uses the received IPv6 prefix (for
example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements
(RAs) regularly by multicast, the ADSL Router passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts.
The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses.
ICMPv6
Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443.
ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify
ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors
encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping".
Multicast Listener Discovery
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's
Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather
than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3.
MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive
multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network.
MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4.
MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join.
MLD Messages
A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast
forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report
message for that address.
An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave
a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then
sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if
other devices connected to this port should remain in the group.
Transition Techniques
IPv6 Over IPv4 Tunnelling
To route traffic between two IPv6 networks over an IPv4 network, an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel has to
be used.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
287
Appendix E IPv6
On the ADSL Router, you can either set up a configured tunnel or an automatic 6to4 tunnel. The
following describes each method.
Configured Tunnel
A configured tunnel is a point-to-point tunnelling mechanism that encapsulates an IPv6 address
with an IPv4 address. Routers (A and B) on both IPv6 networks (1 and 2) each must have an
interface that connects to the IPv4 network (with an IPv4 address). This allows the router to send
and receive IPv6 data over the IPv4 network.
In this case, you must specify B’s public IPv4 address on A (similarly, specify A’s public IPv4
address on B) in order for packets to arrive at the intended destination through the IPv4 network.
Figure 168 Configured Tunnel Example
6to4 Tunnel
A 6to4 tunnel is an automatic tunnelling mechanism that provides connection between IPv6
networks across an IPv4 network. To transmit IPv6 packets over an IPv4 network, the IPv6 packets
are encapsulated inside IPv4 packets.
The following figure shows a network example.
Figure 169 6to4 Relay Router Network Example
In a 6to4 tunnel, 6to4 routers (A and B in the example network) forward these packets between
IPv6 networks (1 and 2) over the IPv4 Internet. A 6to4 relay router (C) connects to both an IPv6
and IPv4 network. A 6to4 relay router is used to forward packets between 6to4 routers in an IPv4
Internet and an IPv6 device (Z) on the IPv6 Internet.
To transmit packets, a 6to4 address is used with a special IPv6 prefix of 2002:: to encode a given
IPv4 address. A 6to4 address has the following format:
2002:IPv4 address:subnet ID:host ID/64
288
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix E IPv6
For example, if you have an IPv4 address of 192.168.1.1 (first converted to binary notation and then to
the colon hexadecimal representation of c0a8:0101), then the 6to4 addresses is 2002:c0a8:0101::1/
64.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista
By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the
ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the
ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses.
C:\>ipv6 install
Installing...
Succeeded.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific
IP Address. . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . .
IP Address. . . . .
Default Gateway . .
DNS
. .
. .
. .
. .
Suffix
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
10.1.1.46
255.255.255.0
fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4
10.1.1.254
IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check
your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available
for the interface on your computer.
Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP
Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment,
you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use
static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore
this section.)
This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:
Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer.
After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client
Install as service.
Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
289
Appendix E IPv6
Click Start and then OK.
Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7
Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7
computer.
To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:
290
Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection.
Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it.
Click OK to save the change.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix E IPv6
Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen.
Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global
address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server.
C:\>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS
IPv6 Address. . . . . .
Link-local IPv6 Address
IPv4 Address. . . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . . . .
Default Gateway . . . .
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Suffix
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
2001:b021:2d::1000
fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11
172.16.100.61
255.255.255.0
fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11
172.16.100.254
291
Appendix E IPv6
292
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers.
• Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
• Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service
uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP
protocol number, not the port number.
• Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.
• If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
• If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
• Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations
in which this service is used.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
293
Appendix F Services
Table 108 Examples of Services
NAME
294
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined
51
The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
AIM
TCP
5190
AOL’s Internet Messenger service.
AUTH
TCP
113
Authentication protocol used by some
servers.
BGP
TCP
179
Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT
UDP
68
DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER
UDP
67
DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME
TCP/UDP
7648
TCP/UDP
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from
White Pines Software.
DNS
TCP/UDP
53
Domain Name Server, a service that
matches web names (for instance
www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined
50
The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security
Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this
service.
FINGER
TCP
79
Finger is a UNIX or Internet related
command that can be used to find out if a
user is logged on.
FTP
TCP
20
TCP
21
File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable
fast transfer of files, including large files
that may not be possible by e-mail.
H.323
TCP
1720
NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP
TCP
80
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS
TCP
443
HTTPS is a secured http session often used
in e-commerce.
ICMP
User-Defined
Internet Control Message Protocol is often
used for diagnostic purposes.
ICQ
UDP
4000
This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST)
User-Defined
Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used
when sending packets to a specific group
of hosts.
IKE
UDP
500
The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is
used for key distribution and management.
IMAP4
TCP
143
The Internet Message Access Protocol is
used for e-mail.
IMAP4S
TCP
993
This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that
runs over SSL.
IRC
TCP/UDP
6667
This is another popular Internet chat
program.
MSN Messenger
TCP
1863
Microsoft Networks’ messenger service
uses this protocol.
NetBIOS
TCP/UDP
137
TCP/UDP
138
The Network Basic Input/Output System is
used for communication between
computers in a LAN.
TCP/UDP
139
TCP/UDP
445
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix F Services
Table 108 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
NEW-ICQ
TCP
5190
An Internet chat program.
NEWS
TCP
144
A protocol for news groups.
NFS
UDP
2049
Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides
transparent file sharing for network
environments.
NNTP
TCP
119
Network News Transport Protocol is the
delivery mechanism for the USENET
newsgroup service.
PING
User-Defined
Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that
sends out ICMP echo requests to test
whether or not a remote host is reachable.
POP3
TCP
110
Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client
computer get e-mail from a POP3 server
through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or
other).
POP3S
TCP
995
This is a more secure version of POP3 that
runs over SSL.
PPTP
TCP
1723
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables
secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined
47
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
enables secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD
TCP
512
Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO
TCP
7070
A streaming audio service that enables real
time sound over the web.
REXEC
TCP
514
Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN
TCP
513
Remote Login.
ROADRUNNER
TCP/UDP
1026
This is an ISP that provides services mainly
for cable modems.
RTELNET
TCP
107
Remote Telnet.
RTSP
TCP/UDP
554
The Real Time Streaming (media control)
Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for
multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP
TCP
115
The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old
way of transferring files between
computers.
SMTP
TCP
25
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the
message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SMTPS
TCP
465
This is a more secure version of SMTP that
runs over SSL.
SNMP
TCP/UDP
161
Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS
TCP/UDP
162
Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
295
Appendix F Services
Table 108 Examples of Services (continued)
296
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
SQL-NET
TCP
1521
Structured Query Language is an interface
to access data on many different types of
database systems, including mainframes,
midrange systems, UNIX systems and
network servers.
SSDP
UDP
1900
The Simple Service Discovery Protocol
supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).
SSH
TCP/UDP
22
Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS
UDP
1558
Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG
UDP
514
Syslog allows you to send system logs to a
UNIX server.
TACACS
UDP
49
Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control System).
TELNET
TCP
23
Telnet is the login and terminal emulation
protocol common on the Internet and in
UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/
IP networks. Its primary function is to
allow users to log into remote host
systems.
VDOLIVE
TCP
7000
UDP
userdefined
A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port
number is specified in the application.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2012 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into
any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it
convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any
products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this
publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
•
•
•
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n(20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE
802.11n(40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 3 through 9.
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the
antenna of this device and all persons.
注意 !
依據
低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用
者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室內使用。
減少電磁波影響，請妥適使用。
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
297
Appendix G Legal Information
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Viewing Certifications
Go to www.zyxel.com to view the product’s documents and certifications.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of
up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications
of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components
without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper
operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value,
and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with,
damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in
no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products
must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of
purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for
parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at
www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Regulatory Information
European Union
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)
Compliance Information for 2.4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC
(R&TTE Directive)
298
[Czech]
ZyXEL tímto prohlašuje, že tento zařízení je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/EC.
[Danish]
Undertegnede ZyXEL erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr udstyr overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
[German]
Hiermit erklärt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gerät Ausstattung in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet.
[Estonian]
Käesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
English
Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
[Spanish]
Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
[Greek]
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ ZyXEL ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ εξοπλισμός ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ
ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕC.
[French]
Par la présente ZyXEL déclare que l'appareil équipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC.
[Italian]
Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
[Latvian]
Ar šo ZyXEL deklarē, ka iekārtas atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
noteikumiem.
[Lithuanian]
Šiuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad šis įranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
[Dutch]
Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
[Maltese]
Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagħmir jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn
relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
[Hungarian]
Alulírott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezés megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EK irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
[Polish]
Niniejszym ZyXEL oświadcza, że sprzęt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
[Portuguese]
ZyXEL declara que este equipamento está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/EC.
[Slovenian]
ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive
1999/5/EC.
[Slovak]
ZyXEL týmto vyhlasuje, že zariadenia spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/EC.
[Finnish]
ZyXEL vakuuttaa täten että laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
[Swedish]
Härmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och
övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EC.
[Bulgarian]
С настоящото ZyXEL декларира, че това оборудване е в съответствие със съществените изисквания и
другите приложими разпоредбите на Директива 1999/5/ЕC.
[Icelandic]
Hér með lýsir, ZyXEL því yfir að þessi búnaður er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur viðeigandi ákvæði
tilskipunar 1999/5/EC.
[Norwegian]
Erklærer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante
bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF.
[Romanian]
Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declară că acest echipament este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi alte prevederi
relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC.
National Restrictions
This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for
the countries mentioned below:
Ce produit peut être utilisé dans tous les pays de l’UE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposés la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune
limitation, excepté pour les pays mentionnés ci-dessous:
Questo prodotto è utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna
limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:
Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschränkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995/5/CE
folgen) mit Außnahme der folgenden aufgeführten Staaten:
In the majority of the EU and other European countries,the 2,4- and 5-GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local
area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both
are applicable.
The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their
national regulations for both the 2,4- and 5-GHz wireless LANs.
The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled “Overview of Regulatory
Requirements for Wireless LANs”:.
Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs
Frequency Band (MHz)
Max Power Level
(EIRP)1 (mW)
2400-2483.5
100
5150-5350
200
5470-5725
1000
Indoor ONLY
Indoor and Outdoor
Belgium
The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range
exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details.
Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch
Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens.
Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extérieur d’une distance supérieure à 300 mètres doivent être notifiées à l’Institut Belge des
services Postaux et des Télécommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples détails.
Denmark
In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage.
I Danmark må frekvensbåndet 5150 - 5350 også anvendes udendørs.
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
299
Appendix G Legal Information
France
For 2.4 GHz, the output power is restricted to 10 mW EIRP when the product is used outdoors in the band 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. There are
no restrictions when used indoors or in other parts of the 2.4 GHz band. Check http://www.arcep.fr/ for more details.
Pour la bande 2.4 GHz, la puissance est limitée à 10 mW en p.i.r.e. pour les équipements utilisés en extérieur dans la bande 2454 2483.5 MHz. Il n'y a pas de restrictions pour des utilisations en intérieur ou dans d'autres parties de la bande 2.4 GHz. Consultez http://
www.arcep.fr/ pour de plus amples détails.
R&TTE 1999/5/EC
WLAN 2.4 – 2.4835 GHz
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Location
Frequency Range(GHz)
Power (EIRP)
Indoor (No restrictions)
2.4 – 2.4835
100mW (20dBm)
Outdoor
2.4 – 2.454
100mW (20dBm)
2.454 – 2.4835
10mW (10dBm)
Italy
This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless
this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a “general authorization.” Please
check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details.
Questo prodotto è conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in
Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una “Autorizzazione Generale”.
Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli.
Latvia
The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://
www.esd.lv for more details.
2.4 GHz frekvenèu joslas izmantoðanai ârpus telpâm nepiecieðama atïauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairâk informâcijas: http://www.esd.lv.
Notes:
1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in
those countries.
2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding
the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm).
Safety Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
Do NOT store things on the device.
Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY
qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe).
Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power
adaptor or cord.
Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the
included antenna(s).
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical
Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and
electronic equipment should be treated separately.
300
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Index
Index
Numbers
802.1p 136
backup
configuration 207
Basic Service Set, See BSS 269
Basic Service Set, see BSS
activation
CWMP 198
dynamic DNS 154
DYNDNS wildcard 154
NAT 140
port binding 150
port forwarding 143
QoS 129
SSID 86
wireless LAN
scheduling 93
WPS 89
BSS 99, 269
example 99
address mapping
types 146
administrator password 21
alternative subnet mask notation 255
antenna
directional 281
gain 281
omni-directional 281
anti-probing 163
AP (access point) 271
applications, NAT 146
Asynchronous Transfer Mode, see ATM
ATM 224
MBS 69, 72
PCR 68, 72
QoS 68, 72, 76
SCR 68, 72
status 224
broadcast 64
CA 183, 276
CBR 68, 72, 76
certificate
factory default 184
Certificate Authority
See CA.
certificates 183
authentication 183
CA
public key 183
replacing 184
storage space 184
trusted CAs 185
Certification Authority 183
Certification Authority. see CA
certifications 297
notices 298
viewing 298
channel 271
interference 271
channel, wireless LAN 96
CLI 15
client list 113
authentication 96, 98
RADIUS server 98
Command Line Interface, see CLI
automatic logout 21
configuration
backup 207
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
compatibility, WDS 91
301
Index
CWMP 197
DHCP 112
IP alias 115
IP precedence 134
IP/MAC filter 156
port forwarding 141
reset 208
restoring 208
static route 124, 126
WAN 64
activation 154
wildcard 153
activation 154
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP
dynamic WEP key exchange 276
DYNDNS wildcard 153
activation 154
connection
nailed-up 75
copyright 297
EAP Authentication 275
CPE WAN Management Protocol, see CWMP
encapsulation 63, 66, 71
ENET ENCAP 73
PPPoA 74
PPPoE 73
RFC 1483 74
CTS (Clear to Send) 272
customized services 169, 170
CWMP 197
activation 198
configuration 197
encryption 98, 277
ENET ENCAP 66, 71, 73
ESS 270
Extended Service Set IDentification 81, 87
Extended Service Set, See ESS 270
data fragment threshold 94, 96
DDoS 162
default LAN IP address 21
default server address 144
default server, NAT 141
FCC interference statement 297
Denials of Service, see DoS
filters 155
IP/MAC 155
structure 155
IP/MAC filter
configuration 156
MAC address 88, 97
URL 155
DHCP 60, 110, 112, 119
diagnostic 223
DiffServ Code Point, see DSCP
digital IDs 183
disclaimer 297
DMZ 144
DNS 110, 119, 217
documentation
related 2
Domain Name System, see DNS
DoS 162
three-way handshake 172
thresholds 163, 172, 173
DSCP 134
DSL connections, status 225
dynamic DNS 153
302
firewalls 161
actions 168
address types 169
anti-probing 163
customized services 169, 170
DDoS 162
default action 165
DoS 162
thresholds 163, 172, 173
ICMP 163
LAND attack 162
logs 168
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Index
P2P 173
packet direction 165
Ping of Death 162
rules 174
security 175
SYN attack 162
three-way handshake 172
triangle route 176
solutions 177
firmware 205
forwarding ports 140, 141
activation 143
configuration 141
example 141
rules 142
fragmentation threshold 94, 96, 272
FTP 15, 214
See IBSS 269
initialization vector (IV) 278
Inside Global Address, see IGA
Inside Local Address, see ILA
Internet Control Message Protocol, see ICMP
Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6
IP address 59, 63, 66, 71, 74, 109, 120
default 21
default server 141
ping 223
private 120
IP alias 114
configuration 115
NAT applications 146
IP precedence 134, 136
configuration 134
IP/MAC filter 155
configuration 156
structure 155
host name 59
IPv6 283
addressing 283
EUI-64 285
global address 284
interface ID 285
link-local address 283
Neighbor Discovery Protocol 283
ping 283
prefix 283
prefix length 283
stateless autoconfiguration 285
unspecified address 284
IANA 260
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
see IANA
LAN 109
client list 113
DHCP 110, 112, 119
DNS 110, 119
IGMP 121
IP address 109, 111, 120
IP alias 114
configuration 115
MAC address 113
multicast 112, 121
RIP 121
subnet mask 110, 120
Guide
Quick Start 2
hidden node 271
host 195
IBSS 269
ICMP 163, 218
IEEE 802.11g 273
IGA 144
IGMP 64, 112, 121
ILA 144
importing trusted CAs 185
Independent Basic Service Set
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
303
Index
LAND attack 162
address mapping
types 146
applications 146
IP alias 146
default server IP address 141
example 146
global 145
IGA 144
ILA 144
inside 145
local 145
outside 145
P2P 140
port forwarding 140, 141
activation 143
configuration 141
example 141
rules 142
remote management 212
limitations
wireless LAN 99
WPS 106
Local Area Network, see LAN
login
passwords 21
logout 21
automatic 21
logs 189
firewalls 168
MAC 59
MAC address 88, 113
filter 88, 97
MAC authentication 88
Network Address Translation
see NAT
Management Information Base (MIB) 216
Network Address Translation, see NAT
managing the device
using FTP. See FTP.
network map 24
mapping address
types 146
Maximum Burst Size, see MBS
Maximum Transmission Unit, see MTU
MBS 69, 72, 76
other documentation 2
MBSSID 100
Media Access Control, see MAC Address
MLD proxy 68
model name 59
MTU 69, 73
multicast 64, 68, 112, 121
IGMPInternet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP
P2P 140, 173
packet direction 165
Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 278, 279
Multiple BSS, see MBSSID
passwords 21
multiplexing 66, 71, 74
LLC-based 74
VC-based 74
PBC 101
PCR 68, 72, 75
Peak Cell Rate, see PCR
PIN, WPS 101
example 103
nailed-up connection 67, 75
NAT 71, 139, 144, 145, 259
activation 140
304
Ping of Death 162
port binding 149
activation 150
summary screen 151
port forwarding 140, 141
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Index
activation 143
configuration 141
example 141
rules 142
NAT 212
SSH 219
Telnet 214
WWW 212
PPPoA 66, 71, 74
reset 18, 208
PPPoE 66, 71, 73
restart 209
preamble 94, 96
restoring configuration 208
preamble mode 273
RFC 1483 66, 71, 74
private IP address 120
RFC 3164 189
probing, firewalls 163
RIP 68, 121
product registration 298
Routing Information Protocol, see RIP
PSK 278
push button 17
RTS (Request To Send) 272
threshold 271, 272
Push Button Configuration, see PBC
rules, port forwarding 142
push button, WPS 101
QoS 127
802.1p 136
activation 129
DSCP 134
example 127
IP precedence 134, 136
priority queue 137
Quality of Service, see QoS
Quick Start Guide 2, 21
RADIUS 274
message types 275
messages 275
shared secret key 275
RADIUS server 98
registration
product 298
related documentation 2
remote management 211
DNS 217
FTP 214
ICMP 218
limitations 212
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
schedules
wireless LAN 93
SCR 68, 72, 75
security
network 175
wireless LAN 96
Security Parameter Index, see SPI
Service Set 81, 87
setup
DHCP 112
IP alias 115
IP precedenceQoS
IP precedence 134
IP/MAC filter 156
port forwarding 141
static route 124, 126
WAN 64
shaping traffic 75, 76
Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP
SNMP 215
agents 216
Manager 216
managers 216
MIB 216
network components 216
versions 215
SPI 162
SSH 219
305
Index
SSID 97
activation 86
MBSSID 100
static route 123
configuration 124, 126
example 123
status 57
ATM 224
DSL connections 225
WPS 90
UBR 68, 72, 77
unicast 64
Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP
upgrading firmware 205
UPnP 114
cautions 110
NAT traversal 110
subnet 253
URL 155
subnet mask 110, 120, 254
URL filter
URL 155
subnetting 256
Sustain Cell Rate, see SCR
SYN attack 162
syslog
protocol 189
severity levels 189
system 201
firmware 205
passwords 21
reset 18
status 57
time 201
VBR-nRT 68, 72, 76
System Info 58
system name 59
VBR 76
VBR-RT 68, 72, 76
VCI 66, 71, 74
version
firmware
version 59
Virtual Channel Identifier, see VCI
Virtual Path Identifier, see VPI
VPI 66, 71, 74
Telnet 214
three-way handshake 172
thresholds
data fragment 94, 96
DoS 163, 172, 173
P2P 173
time 201
TR-069 15
trademarks 297
traffic shaping 75
example 76
triangle route 176
solutions 177
trusted CAs, and certificates 185
306
WAN 63
ATM QoS 68, 72, 76
encapsulation 63, 66, 71
IGMP 64
IP address 63, 66, 71, 74
mode 66, 71
MTU 69, 73
multicast 64, 68
multiplexing 66, 71, 74
nailed-up connection 67, 75
NAT 71
RIP 68
setup 64
traffic shaping 75
example 76
VCI 66, 71, 74
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
Index
VPI 66, 71, 74
warranty 298
note 298
WDS 90, 100
compatibility 91
example 100
Web Configurator 21
web configurator 15
passwords 21
WEP 98
WEP Encryption 83, 84
WEP encryption 82
WEP key 82
Wide Area Network, see WAN
Wi-Fi Protected Access 277
PIN 101
push button 17, 101
status 90
wireless security 273
Wireless tutorial 32
WLAN
interference 271
security parameters 280
WPA 98, 277
key caching 278
pre-authentication 278
user authentication 278
vs WPA-PSK 278
wireless client supplicant 278
with RADIUS application example 279
wireless client WPA supplicants 278
WPA2 277
user authentication 278
vs WPA2-PSK 278
wireless client supplicant 278
with RADIUS application example 279
Wireless Distribution System, see WDS
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 277
wireless LAN 79, 95
authentication 96, 98
BSS 99
example 99
channel 96
encryption 98
example 95
fragmentation threshold 94, 96
limitations 99
MAC address filter 88, 97
MBSSID 100
preamble 94, 96
RADIUS server 98
scheduling 93
security 96
SSID 97
activation 86
WDS 90, 100
compatibility 91
example 100
WEP 98
WPA 98
WPA-PSK 98
WPS 89, 100, 103
activation 89
example 104
limitations 106
WPA2-PSK 277, 278
application example 279
WiFi Protected Setup, see WPS
wireless
client configuration 35
P-660HN-Tx(A) v2 User’s Guide
WPA-PSK 98, 277, 278
application example 279
WPS 89, 100, 103
activation 89
example 104
limitations 106
PIN 101
example 103
push button 17, 101
status 90
307

Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2012:03:14 09:25:51Z
Modify Date                     : 2012:03:14 10:58:35+08:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 
Title                           : 
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2012:03:14 10:58:35+08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.4.6 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:152929fa-d98e-4935-86a3-61d132acc7c5
Instance ID                     : uuid:dd069201-63cf-4c86-a96e-9a433ae0892f
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 307


EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

FCC ID Filing: I88P660HNT1AV2


								

							
		
		

			
Navigation menu